guide to performing lte simulation operations by using the u-net v3r9

596
Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Product Version Confidentiality level V300R009 INTERNAL Product Name Total 597 pages GENEX U-Net Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net (INTERNAL) Prepared By Date Reviewed By Date Reviewed By Date Approved By Date Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Upload: teo-pisco

Post on 05-Jan-2016

40 views

Category:

Documents


10 download

DESCRIPTION

lte

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

Product Version Confidentiality level

V300R009 INTERNAL

Product NameTotal 474 pages

GENEX U-Net

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation

Operations by Using the U-Net

(INTERNAL)

Prepared By Date

Reviewed By Date

Reviewed By Date

Approved By Date

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All rights reserved

Page 2: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Change History

Date Version

Description Author

July 20, 2011

V1.0 The initial draft of the WCDMA Simulation Operation Guide is completed.

Qi Huan (ID: 00163940), Zhang Lei (ID: 00168887), Yang Yongde (ID: 00176546), Lou Kaiwei (ID: 00148416), Mou Heping (ID: 00149906),

Nov 25, 2013

V2.0 Update to V300R009 liaoyang 00225775

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page i of 474

Page 3: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Contents

1 Overview............................................................................11.1 Interface Introduction.....................................................................................................................1

1.2 U-Net Planning Procedure.............................................................................................................3

2 U-Net Operations................................................................52.1 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................5

2.2 Importing Map Data.......................................................................................................................6

2.2.1 Importing Map Data Quickly...............................................................................................7

2.2.2 Importing Map Data by Layer............................................................................................10

2.2.3 Map Calibration..................................................................................................................24

2.2.4 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode........................................................................24

2.2.5 Setting Map Parameters......................................................................................................26

2.3 Importing and Setting Engineering Parameters...........................................................................28

2.3.1 Setting Propagation Models................................................................................................28

2.3.2 Importing and Modifying Antenna Information.................................................................33

2.3.3 Setting Site Equipment Parameters....................................................................................39

2.3.4 Importing Site Information.................................................................................................40

2.3.5 Importing Transceiver Information....................................................................................46

2.3.6 Setting the Frequency Band................................................................................................50

2.3.7 Importing Cell Information................................................................................................53

2.3.8 Setting the Traffic Model....................................................................................................58

2.3.9 Configuring a Traffic Map..................................................................................................74

3 Planning and Simulation....................................................883.1 Prediction.....................................................................................................................................88

3.1.1 Setting Prediction Parameters.............................................................................................88

3.1.2 Setting Prediction Global Parameters...............................................................................102

3.1.3 Creating a Prediction Group.............................................................................................104

3.1.4 Running the Prediction.....................................................................................................111

3.1.5 Viewing the Prediction Result..........................................................................................120

3.1.6 Adjusting Parameters Based on Prediction Results..........................................................139

3.1.7 Comparing Prediction Results in Different Scenarios......................................................140

3.1.8 Exporting Prediction Results............................................................................................143

3.1.9 Printing Prediction Results...............................................................................................1432023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page ii of 474

Page 4: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

3.1.10 Method 1.........................................................................................................................143

3.1.11 Modifying a Prediction Group........................................................................................145

3.1.12 Deleting a Prediction Group...........................................................................................149

3.2 Neighboring Cell Planning........................................................................................................151

3.2.1 Planning Data...................................................................................................................151

3.2.2 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning of a New Network......................................................153

3.2.3 Neighboring Cell Replanning When Partial Network Is Expanded.................................167

3.2.4 Planning Neighboring Cells of 4G Networks Using Neighboring Cells of 2G/3G Networks....................................................................................................................................169

3.2.5 Checking Configurations of Neighboring Cells...............................................................172

3.3 PCI Planning..............................................................................................................................175

3.3.1 Setting PCI Planning Parameters......................................................................................175

3.3.2 PCI Planning of a New/Expanded Network.....................................................................176

3.3.3 Checking the PCI Planning...............................................................................................195

3.4 PRACH Planning.......................................................................................................................197

3.4.1 Setting PRACH Planning Parameters...............................................................................197

3.4.2 PRANCH Planning of a New Network............................................................................199

3.5 Frequency Planning...................................................................................................................208

3.5.1 Setting Frequency Planning Parameters...........................................................................208

3.5.2 Frequency Planning in 1x1 + ICIC Networking...............................................................209

3.5.3 Frequency Planning in 1x3 Networking Mode.................................................................219

3.6 RF Planning...............................................................................................................................221

3.6.1 Setting Planning Parameters.............................................................................................221

3.6.2 Running the RF Planning.................................................................................................226

3.6.3 Viewing RF Planning Results...........................................................................................228

3.6.4 Exporting RF Planning Results........................................................................................231

3.6.5 Submitting RF Planning Results.......................................................................................233

3.7 Capacity Simulation...................................................................................................................233

3.7.1 Setting Capacity Simulation Parameters..........................................................................233

3.7.2 Creating a Simulation Group............................................................................................241

3.7.3 Running the Simulation Group.........................................................................................245

3.7.4 Viewing Capacity Simulation Results..............................................................................246

3.7.5 Submitting Capacity Simulation Results..........................................................................265

3.7.6 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results............................................................................268

3.8 ASP............................................................................................................................................273

3.8.1 ASP Application Scenarios...............................................................................................274

3.8.2 Preparations for the Planning...........................................................................................275

3.8.3 Creating an ASP Group....................................................................................................278

3.8.4 Setting ASP Parameters....................................................................................................279

3.8.5 Executing ASP..................................................................................................................291

3.8.6 Stopping ASP....................................................................................................................294

3.8.7 Viewing ASP Results........................................................................................................295

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page iii of 474

Page 5: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

3.8.8 Displaying ASP Results on the Map.................................................................................309

3.9 ACP............................................................................................................................................317

3.9.1 ACP Parameter Preparations..................................................................................317

3.9.2 Creating an ACP Group............................................................................................318

3.9.3 Setting Antenna Combination Parameters.......................................................321

3.9.4 Querying ACP Results...............................................................................................326

3.9.5 Displaying ACP Results Geographically.............................................................329

3.9.6 ACP GUI References..................................................................................................333

3.10 ACP-Automatic Cell Planning.................................................................................................349

3.10.1 Preparing Data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning.........................................................349

3.10.2 Creating an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group.........................................................350

3.10.3 Checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results..........................................................371

3.10.4 Displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results on a Map........................................378

4 Appendix........................................................................3814.1 Obtaining Engineering Parameter Templates of the U-Net Quickly.........................................381

4.2 Polygon......................................................................................................................................384

4.2.1 Creating a Polygon...........................................................................................................384

4.2.2 Polygon Operations..........................................................................................................385

4.2.3 Setting the Properties of a Polygon..................................................................................387

4.2.4 Combing Polygons...........................................................................................................390

4.2.5 Polygon Usage..................................................................................................................392

4.3 Point Analysis............................................................................................................................393

4.3.1 Viewing Signal Statuses from Each Cell to the Point Respectively.................................394

4.3.2 Viewing Signal Status from Each Cell to the Point Simultaneously................................396

4.3.3 Viewing Signal Statuses of Pilots and Services of the Best Server Cell..........................397

4.4 Print............................................................................................................................................401

4.5 Propagation Model Calibration..................................................................................................406

4.5.1 Description of the CW File...............................................................................................406

4.5.2 Importing the Bin Point Information................................................................................406

4.5.3 Performing the Propagation Model Calibration...............................................................408

4.6 U-Net Map Calibration..............................................................................................................410

4.7 Interconnection with the MapInfo.............................................................................................412

4.7.1 Polygon.............................................................................................................................412

4.7.2 Exporting Prediction Results............................................................................................415

4.8 Interconnection with the Google Earth......................................................................................416

4.9 Combining Maps with Different Precisions..............................................................................418

4.10 Obtaining the Coordinate System of the Map Based on the Map File....................................423

4.11 Tips for Using the U-Net..........................................................................................................426

4.11.1 Hiding and Unhiding Columns of a Table......................................................................426

4.11.2 Rollback..........................................................................................................................427

4.11.3 Custom Fields.................................................................................................................428

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page iv of 474

Page 6: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

4.11.4 Searching for NEs...........................................................................................................431

4.11.5 Moving a Site to a Higher Location...............................................................................432

4.11.6 Terrain View....................................................................................................................434

4.11.7 Distance Measurement....................................................................................................435

4.12 Summary of Propagation Model Parameters...........................................................................437

4.12.1 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata...............................................................................................437

4.12.2 Clutter Related Hata.......................................................................................................438

4.12.3 SPM................................................................................................................................440

4.12.4 ITURP.............................................................................................................................441

4.12.5 Keenan-Motley...............................................................................................................442

4.12.6 Volcano...........................................................................................................................442

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page v of 474

Page 7: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure

Figure 1-1 Main interface of the U-Net..............................................................................................1

Figure 1-2 U-Net planning procedure.................................................................................................3

Figure 2-1 Creating a LTE project (1).................................................................................................5

Figure 2-2 Creating a LTE project (2).................................................................................................6

Figure 2-3 Creating a LTE project (3).................................................................................................6

Figure 2-4 Importing the map data (1)................................................................................................7

Figure 2-5 Importing the map data (2)................................................................................................8

Figure 2-6 Importing the map data (3)................................................................................................8

Figure 2-7 Importing the map data (4)................................................................................................9

Figure 2-8 Importing the map data (5)................................................................................................9

Figure 2-9 Setting the coordinate......................................................................................................10

Figure 2-10 Selecting a projection....................................................................................................11

Figure 2-11 Importing a Clutter layer...............................................................................................11

Figure 2-12 Importing a Clutter file..................................................................................................12

Figure 2-13 Effect after a Clutter is imported...................................................................................12

Figure 2-14 Importing a Height layer...............................................................................................13

Figure 2-15 Importing a Height file..................................................................................................14

Figure 2-16 Effect after a Height file is imported.............................................................................14

Figure 2-17 Importing a Building file...............................................................................................15

Figure 2-18 Importing a Building file...............................................................................................16

Figure 2-19 Effect after a Building file is imported..........................................................................16

Figure 2-20 Importing a Vector layer................................................................................................17

Figure 2-21 Importing a Vector file..................................................................................................18

Figure 2-22 Effect after a Vector file is imported.............................................................................18

Figure 2-23 Importing a Geometry layer..........................................................................................19

Figure 2-24 Importing a Geometry file.............................................................................................19

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page vi of 474

Page 8: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-25 Effect after a Geometry file is imported........................................................................20

Figure 2-26 Importing a text map.....................................................................................................20

Figure 2-27 Importing a text map.....................................................................................................21

Figure 2-28 Effect after a text map is imported................................................................................21

Figure 2-29 Importing a satellite picture...........................................................................................22

Figure 2-30 Importing a satellite picture...........................................................................................22

Figure 2-31 Setting the coordinate location of a satellite picture.....................................................23

Figure 2-32 Effect after a satellite map is imported..........................................................................24

Figure 2-33 Setting the coordinate format of a map.........................................................................25

Figure 2-34 Setting the coordinate format of a map.........................................................................25

Figure 2-35 Clutter parameter setting (1).........................................................................................26

Figure 2-36 Clutter parameter setting (2).........................................................................................27

Figure 2-37 Setting the propagation model (1).................................................................................33

Figure 2-38 Setting the propagation model (2).................................................................................33

Figure 2-39 Formats of MSI antenna files........................................................................................34

Figure 2-40 Format of a .txt antenna file..........................................................................................35

Figure 2-41 Importing antenna information......................................................................................36

Figure 2-42 Importing/exporting antenna information.....................................................................36

Figure 2-43 Antenna file...................................................................................................................37

Figure 2-44 Viewing the antenna property........................................................................................38

Figure 2-45 Antenna property window.............................................................................................38

Figure 2-46 Setting the Site Equipment (1)......................................................................................39

Figure 2-47 Setting the Site Equipment (2)......................................................................................39

Figure 2-48 Importing site information (1).......................................................................................40

Figure 2-49 Importing site information (2).......................................................................................41

Figure 2-50 Viewing site information (1).........................................................................................42

Figure 2-51 Viewing site information (2).........................................................................................42

Figure 2-52 Setting the display mode of a site..................................................................................43

Figure 2-53 Label Display tab page in the Display Field window...................................................43

Figure 2-54 Effect after labels are set...............................................................................................44

Figure 2-55 Default displaying setting of sites and group division setting......................................45

Figure 2-56 Setting the display mode...............................................................................................45

Figure 2-57 Importing transceiver information (1)...........................................................................46

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page vii of 474

Page 9: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-58 Antenna setting (1)........................................................................................................47

Figure 2-59 Antenna setting (2)........................................................................................................47

Figure 2-60 Antenna setting (3)........................................................................................................48

Figure 2-61 Transceiver setting (1)...................................................................................................49

Figure 2-62 Transceiver setting (2)...................................................................................................50

Figure 2-63 Frequency band setting (1)............................................................................................51

Figure 2-64 Frequency band setting (2)............................................................................................51

Figure 2-65 Frequency band setting (3)............................................................................................52

Figure 2-66 Importing cell information (1).......................................................................................53

Figure 2-67 Cell parameter setting (1)..............................................................................................54

Figure 2-68 Cell parameter setting (2)..............................................................................................55

Figure 2-69 Mobility type (1)...........................................................................................................58

Figure 2-70 Mobility type (2)...........................................................................................................59

Figure 2-71 Mobility type (3)...........................................................................................................59

Figure 2-72 Default service types.....................................................................................................60

Figure 2-73 LTE Service Properties..................................................................................................61

Figure 2-74 Creating a service type..................................................................................................62

Figure 2-75 Setting terminals............................................................................................................63

Figure 2-76 Creating a terminal type................................................................................................63

Figure 2-77 Defining the reception equipment.................................................................................65

Figure 2-78 Displaying the MCS bearer table..................................................................................65

Figure 2-79 MCS bearer table...........................................................................................................66

Figure 2-80 Default UE Reception Equipment Properties................................................................66

Figure 2-81 Bear Index/Ec/Nt mapping table...................................................................................67

Figure 2-82 Default types of user behaviors.....................................................................................68

Figure 2-83 Creating a user behavior (1)..........................................................................................68

Figure 2-84 Creating a user behavior (2)..........................................................................................69

Figure 2-85 Comparing user behaviors (1).......................................................................................70

Figure 2-86 Comparing user behaviors (2).......................................................................................70

Figure 2-87 Environments (1)...........................................................................................................71

Figure 2-88 Environments (2)...........................................................................................................71

Figure 2-89 Environments (3)...........................................................................................................72

Figure 2-90 Environments (4)...........................................................................................................72

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page viii of 474

Page 10: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-91 Comparing traffic environments (1)..............................................................................73

Figure 2-92 Comparing traffic environments (2)..............................................................................73

Figure 2-93 Traffic map....................................................................................................................74

Figure 2-94 Based on Environments (1)...........................................................................................75

Figure 2-95 Based on Environments (2)...........................................................................................75

Figure 2-96 Based on Environments (3)...........................................................................................76

Figure 2-97 Based on Environments (4)...........................................................................................77

Figure 2-98 Vector Traffic Map Properties (1).................................................................................77

Figure 2-99 Vector Traffic Map Properties (2).................................................................................78

Figure 2-100 Vector Traffic Map Properties (3)...............................................................................79

Figure 2-101 Adding a vector...........................................................................................................79

Figure 2-102 Selecting a vector........................................................................................................80

Figure 2-103 Select Map Type..........................................................................................................80

Figure 2-104 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (General).............................................................81

Figure 2-105 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Transceiver)......................................................81

Figure 2-106 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Traffic)..............................................................82

Figure 2-107 Select Map Type..........................................................................................................83

Figure 2-108 User Location Traffic Map Properties.........................................................................83

Figure 2-109 Importing the user location (1)....................................................................................84

Figure 2-110 Importing the user location (2)....................................................................................84

Figure 2-111 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties.............................................................................86

Figure 2-112 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties.............................................................................87

Figure 3-1 Prediction properties (1)................................................................................................103

Figure 3-2 Prediction properties (2)................................................................................................103

Figure 3-3 Prediction properties (3)................................................................................................104

Figure 3-4 Creating a prediction group (1).....................................................................................105

Figure 3-5 Creating a prediction group (2).....................................................................................105

Figure 3-6 Creating a prediction group (3).....................................................................................106

Figure 3-7 Creating a prediction group (4).....................................................................................107

Figure 3-8 Creating a prediction group (5).....................................................................................108

Figure 3-9 Creating a prediction group (6).....................................................................................109

Figure 3-10 Creating a prediction group (7)...................................................................................110

Figure 3-11 Creating a prediction group (8)....................................................................................111

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page ix of 474

Page 11: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-12 Calculating a single prediction group..........................................................................112

Figure 3-13 Locking prediction studies..........................................................................................113

Figure 3-14 Unlocking prediction studies.......................................................................................113

Figure 3-15 Failing to perform the calculation...............................................................................114

Figure 3-16 Calculating multiple prediction groups.......................................................................115

Figure 3-17 Locking prediction studies..........................................................................................116

Figure 3-18 Unlocking prediction studies.......................................................................................117

Figure 3-19 Failing to perform the calculation...............................................................................118

Figure 3-20 Calculation progress....................................................................................................118

Figure 3-21 Stopping the prediction calculation (1).......................................................................119

Figure 3-22 Stopping the prediction calculation (2).......................................................................120

Figure 3-23 Example of a prediction map......................................................................................121

Figure 3-24 Setting the legend (1)..................................................................................................121

Figure 3-25 Setting the legend (2)..................................................................................................122

Figure 3-26 Setting the legend (3)..................................................................................................123

Figure 3-27 Setting the legend (4)..................................................................................................123

Figure 3-28 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (1)..................................................................124

Figure 3-29 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (2)..................................................................125

Figure 3-30 Items in the shortcut menu for the statistics about a single an indicator.....................126

Figure 3-31 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a counter (1)......................................................126

Figure 3-32 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of an indicator (2).................................................127

Figure 3-33 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (1)..................................................127

Figure 3-34 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)..................................................128

Figure 3-35 Items in the shortcut menu for the indicator statistics about a prediction group........129

Figure 3-36 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1).......................................130

Figure 3-37 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2).......................................130

Figure 3-38 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1)........................................131

Figure 3-39 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2)........................................132

Figure 3-40 Selecting indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink throughput........133

Figure 3-41 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a selected uplink or downlink indicator............133

Figure 3-42 Exporting a statistics table (1).....................................................................................134

Figure 3-43 Exporting a statistics table (2).....................................................................................134

Figure 3-44 Exporting a statistics table (3).....................................................................................135

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page x of 474

Page 12: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-45 Exporting a statistics table (4).....................................................................................136

Figure 3-46 Exporting a statistics table (5).....................................................................................136

Figure 3-47 Exporting a statistics table (6).....................................................................................137

Figure 3-48 Exporting bin data.......................................................................................................137

Figure 3-49 Exporting data by area.................................................................................................138

Figure 3-50 Exporting data by DL RSRP.......................................................................................139

Figure 3-51 Exporting data by top signal level...............................................................................139

Figure 3-52 Copying the prediction group......................................................................................140

Figure 3-53 Comparing prediction results (1).................................................................................141

Figure 3-54 Comparing prediction results (2).................................................................................141

Figure 3-55 Comparing prediction results (3).................................................................................142

Figure 3-56 Comparing prediction results (4).................................................................................143

Figure 3-57 Printing PDF figures in batches (1).............................................................................144

Figure 3-58 Printing PDF figures in batches (2).............................................................................145

Figure 3-59 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (1).....................................................146

Figure 3-60 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (2).....................................................147

Figure 3-61 Adding/deleting prediction studies (1)........................................................................148

Figure 3-62 Adding/deleting prediction studies (2)........................................................................149

Figure 3-63 Deleting the selected prediction group........................................................................150

Figure 3-64 Deleting all single cell prediction groups....................................................................151

Figure 3-65 Starting the neighboring cell planning........................................................................154

Figure 3-66 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (1).......................................................154

Figure 3-67 Filtering cells...............................................................................................................156

Figure 3-68 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (2).......................................................157

Figure 3-69 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (3).......................................................157

Figure 3-70 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (4).......................................................158

Figure 3-71 Running the neighboring cell auto-planning...............................................................159

Figure 3-72 Stopping neighboring cell auto-planning....................................................................159

Figure 3-73 Viewing neighboring cell planning results in tables...................................................160

Figure 3-74 Geographically displaying neighboring cells..............................................................162

Figure 3-75 Setting the geographical display mode of neighboring cells.......................................162

Figure 3-76 Setting the colors of connection lines for the geographical display mode of neighboring cells..............................................................................................................................163

Figure 3-77 Setting cell colors for the geographical display of neighboring cells.........................164

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xi of 474

Page 13: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-78 Geographical display of neighboring cells..................................................................165

Figure 3-79 Submitting neighboring cell planning results..............................................................166

Figure 3-80 Exporting neighboring cell relationships....................................................................166

Figure 3-81 Selecting the mode for exporting neighboring cell relationships................................166

Figure 3-82 Export files of neighboring cell relationships.............................................................167

Figure 3-83 Importing neighboring cell relationships (1)...............................................................168

Figure 3-84 Importing neighboring cell relationships (2)...............................................................168

Figure 3-85 Importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks....................................170

Figure 3-86 Referring to neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks.................................171

Figure 3-87 Filtering neighboring cell relationships.......................................................................172

Figure 3-88 Criteria for filtering neighboring cell relationships.....................................................173

Figure 3-89 Auditing neighboring cell relationships......................................................................174

Figure 3-90 Criteria for auditing neighboring cell relationships....................................................174

Figure 3-91 Result files of auditing neighboring cell relationships................................................175

Figure 3-92 Window for setting the LTE PCI planning..................................................................177

Figure 3-93 LTE PCI planning (1)..................................................................................................177

Figure 3-94 LTE PCI planning (2)..................................................................................................178

Figure 3-95 LTE PCI planning (3)..................................................................................................179

Figure 3-96 LTE PCI auto-planning................................................................................................180

Figure 3-97 Example when PCIs are insufficient...........................................................................180

Figure 3-98 Displayed message when PCIs are insufficient...........................................................181

Figure 3-99 Stopping the LTE PCI auto-planning..........................................................................181

Figure 3-100 Viewing LTE PCI planning results............................................................................182

Figure 3-101 Table of LTE PCI results...........................................................................................182

Figure 3-102 Viewing LTE PCIs in geographical display mode....................................................183

Figure 3-103 Setting the geographical display of PCIs..................................................................183

Figure 3-104 Geographical display of LTE PCIs............................................................................184

Figure 3-105 Geographical display of LTE PCIs............................................................................184

Figure 3-106 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display S mode..............................185

Figure 3-107 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-link)..............186

Figure 3-108 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-cell)..............187

Figure 3-109 Geographical display of LTE PCIs............................................................................188

Figure 3-110 Adjusting existing PCIs.............................................................................................189

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xii of 474

Page 14: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-111 Submitting LTE PCI planning results........................................................................189

Figure 3-112 Exporting LTE PCI planning results..........................................................................190

Figure 3-113 Template of exporting PCI planning results..............................................................190

Figure 3-114 Exporting the cluster information about PCIs that support the segmental capacity expansion.........................................................................................................................................191

Figure 3-115 Template for exporting PCI planning results (cluster information)...........................191

Figure 3-116 Filtering LTE PCIs.....................................................................................................191

Figure 3-117 Filtering LTE PCI results...........................................................................................192

Figure 3-118 Auditing LTE PCI results..........................................................................................193

Figure 3-119 Setting the auditing of LTE PCI results.....................................................................193

Figure 3-120 Displaying the statistics of LTE PCI results..............................................................194

Figure 3-121 Importing the cell PCI information...........................................................................195

Figure 3-122 Checking PCIs...........................................................................................................196

Figure 3-123 Window for setting PRACH parameters...................................................................198

Figure 3-124 Window for setting parameters.................................................................................199

Figure 3-125 Filtering planning cells..............................................................................................200

Figure 3-126 Running the PRACH auto-planning..........................................................................200

Figure 3-127 Window of the PRACH planning result....................................................................201

Figure 3-128 Displaying the window of the planning result..........................................................202

Figure 3-129 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (1).......................................................202

Figure 3-130 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (2).......................................................203

Figure 3-131 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (3).......................................................203

Figure 3-132 Selecting LTE PRACH Planning...............................................................................204

Figure 3-133 Displaying transceivers that have reuse relationship with the selected transceiver on the GIS map.....................................................................................................................................204

Figure 3-134 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (1)..................................................205

Figure 3-135 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (2)..................................................205

Figure 3-136 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (3)..................................................205

Figure 3-137 Manually adjusting planning results (1)....................................................................206

Figure 3-138 Manually adjusting planning results (2)....................................................................206

Figure 3-139 Submitting planning results.......................................................................................206

Figure 3-140 Exporting planning results (1)...................................................................................207

Figure 3-141 Exporting planning results (2)...................................................................................207

Figure 3-142 Displaying the window of setting planning parameters............................................208

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xiii of 474

Page 15: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-143 Window of setting planning parameters....................................................................209

Figure 3-144 Filtering planning cells..............................................................................................210

Figure 3-145 Window of selecting bands and frequencies.............................................................211

Figure 3-146 Planning result window.............................................................................................212

Figure 3-147 Exporting planning results........................................................................................213

Figure 3-148 Displaying the frequency statistics window..............................................................213

Figure 3-149 Window of statistics of planning results (1)..............................................................214

Figure 3-150 Window of statistics of planning results (2)..............................................................215

Figure 3-151 Window of setting the rendering color on the GIS map............................................215

Figure 3-152 Displaying auditing results on the GIS map..............................................................216

Figure 3-153 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (1)......................................217

Figure 3-154 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (2)......................................217

Figure 3-155 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (3)......................................218

Figure 3-156 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (4)......................................218

Figure 3-157 Displaying the parameter setting window.................................................................219

Figure 3-158 Setting the 1x3 networking mode..............................................................................219

Figure 3-159 Creating a RF planning group...................................................................................220

Figure 3-160 General tab page in the RF Planning window...........................................................221

Figure 3-161 Setting the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR...........................................................222

Figure 3-162 Location relations of simulation areas and analysis areas.........................................223

Figure 3-163 Control Parameter tab page in the RF Planning window..........................................224

Figure 3-164 Running the RF planning..........................................................................................226

Figure 3-165 Interface during the RF planning..............................................................................226

Figure 3-166 Displaying RF planning results.................................................................................227

Figure 3-167 General tab page in the RF Result window...............................................................228

Figure 3-168 Graph tab page in the RF Result window.................................................................228

Figure 3-169 Cell Parameters tab page in the RF Result window..................................................229

Figure 3-170 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RSRP coverage prediction figure.....230

Figure 3-171 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RS SINR coverage prediction figure..........................................................................................................................................................230

Figure 3-172 Exporting RF planning results...................................................................................231

Figure 3-173 Format for exporting RF planning results.................................................................231

Figure 3-174 Dialog box displayed after clicking Commit............................................................232

Figure 3-175 Creating a simulation group (1)................................................................................241

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xiv of 474

Page 16: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-176 Creating a simulation group (2)................................................................................241

Figure 3-177 Creating a simulation group (3)................................................................................242

Figure 3-178 Creating a simulation group (4)................................................................................243

Figure 3-179 Running a simulation group (1)................................................................................244

Figure 3-180 Running a simulation group (2)................................................................................244

Figure 3-181 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (1)...............................................245

Figure 3-182 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (2)...............................................246

Figure 3-183 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (3)...............................................248

Figure 3-184 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (4)...............................................250

Figure 3-185 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (1)............................................................251

Figure 3-186 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (2)............................................................251

Figure 3-187 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (3)............................................................252

Figure 3-188 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (4)............................................................252

Figure 3-189 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (5)............................................................253

Figure 3-190 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (1)........................................................254

Figure 3-191 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (2)........................................................255

Figure 3-192 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (3)........................................................255

Figure 3-193 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (4)........................................................256

Figure 3-194 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (5)........................................................256

Figure 3-195 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (6)........................................................257

Figure 3-196 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (7)........................................................257

Figure 3-197 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (8)........................................................258

Figure 3-198 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (9)........................................................258

Figure 3-199 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (10)......................................................259

Figure 3-200 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (11)......................................................259

Figure 3-201 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (1)......260

Figure 3-202 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (2)......260

Figure 3-203 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (3)......261

Figure 3-204 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (1)....................................262

Figure 3-205 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (2)....................................263

Figure 3-206 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (1)...............................263

Figure 3-207 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (2)...............................264

Figure 3-208 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (3)...............................264

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xv of 474

Page 17: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 3-209 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (1)...................................................264

Figure 3-210 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (2)...................................................265

Figure 3-211 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (3)....................................................265

Figure 3-212 Exporting simulation results in batches (1)...............................................................266

Figure 3-213 Exporting simulation results in batches (2)...............................................................266

Figure 3-214 Exporting simulation results in batches (3)...............................................................267

Figure 3-215 Exporting simulation results in batches (4)...............................................................267

Figure 3-216 Exporting simulation results in batches (5)...............................................................268

Figure 3-217 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (1)...........................................268

Figure 3-218 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (2)...........................................269

Figure 3-219 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (3)...........................................269

Figure 3-220 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (4)...........................................270

Figure 3-221 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (5)...........................................270

Figure 3-222 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (6)...........................................271

Figure 4-1 Exporting the engineering parameter template.............................................................275

Figure 4-2 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a site................................................276

Figure 4-3 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a transceiver....................................276

Figure 4-4 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a cell...............................................277

Figure 4-5 Creating a polygon (1)...................................................................................................278

Figure 4-6 Creating a polygon (2)...................................................................................................278

Figure 4-7 Creating a polygon (3)...................................................................................................278

Figure 4-8 Polygon operations........................................................................................................279

Figure 4-9 Polygon operations........................................................................................................279

Figure 4-10 Viewing properties of a polygon.................................................................................280

Figure 4-11 Displaying the properties of a polygon.......................................................................280

Figure 4-12 Polygon properties (1).................................................................................................281

Figure 4-13 Polygon properties (2).................................................................................................281

Figure 4-14 Polygon properties (3).................................................................................................282

Figure 4-15 Polygon properties (4).................................................................................................282

Figure 4-16 Polygon operations (1)................................................................................................283

Figure 4-17 Polygon operations (2)................................................................................................284

Figure 4-18 Polygon operations (3)................................................................................................285

Figure 4-19 Polygon usage.............................................................................................................286

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xvi of 474

Page 18: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 4-20 Point analysis (1).........................................................................................................287

Figure 4-21 Point analysis (2).........................................................................................................287

Figure 4-22 Point analysis (3).........................................................................................................288

Figure 4-23 Point analysis (4).........................................................................................................288

Figure 4-24 Point analysis (5).........................................................................................................288

Figure 4-25 Point analysis (6).........................................................................................................289

Figure 4-26 Point analysis (7).........................................................................................................289

Figure 4-27 Point analysis (8).........................................................................................................290

Figure 4-28 Point analysis (9).........................................................................................................290

Figure 4-29 Point analysis (10).......................................................................................................291

Figure 4-30 Point analysis (11).......................................................................................................291

Figure 4-31 Point analysis (12).......................................................................................................292

Figure 4-32 Point analysis (13).......................................................................................................293

Figure 4-33 Entrance for printing setting........................................................................................293

Figure 4-34 Printing setting window (1).........................................................................................294

Figure 4-35 Printing setting window (2).........................................................................................294

Figure 4-36 Printing setting window (3).........................................................................................295

Figure 4-37 Printing setting window (4).........................................................................................296

Figure 4-38 Print preview/print (1).................................................................................................297

Figure 4-39 Print preview/print (2).................................................................................................297

Figure 4-40 CW data file.................................................................................................................298

Figure 4-41 Entrance for importing DT data..................................................................................299

Figure 4-42 Window for importing the CW data............................................................................299

Figure 4-43 Project display after the CW data is imported.............................................................300

Figure 4-44 Starting the propagation model calibration from the navigation tree..........................301

Figure 4-45 Window for setting the propagation model calibration...............................................301

Figure 4-46 Result of propagation model calibration.....................................................................302

Figure 4-47 Map calibration (1)......................................................................................................303

Figure 4-48 Map calibration (2)......................................................................................................303

Figure 4-49 Map calibration (3)......................................................................................................304

Figure 4-50 Exporting polygons in MIF format (1)........................................................................305

Figure 4-51 Exporting polygons in MIF format (2)........................................................................305

Figure 4-52 Importing polygons in MIF format (1)........................................................................306

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xvii of 474

Page 19: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 4-53 Importing polygons in MIF format (2)........................................................................306

Figure 4-54 Exporting prediction results (1)...................................................................................307

Figure 4-55 Exporting prediction results (2)...................................................................................308

Figure 4-56 Interconnection with the Google Earth (1)..................................................................308

Figure 4-57 Interconnection with the Google Earth (2)..................................................................309

Figure 4-58 Interconnection with the Google Earth (3)..................................................................310

Figure 4-59 Relations of maps with four precisions.......................................................................311

Figure 4-60 Prediction before maps are combined.........................................................................311

Figure 4-61 Volcano map parameter settings..................................................................................312

Figure 4-62 Clutter ID description before maps are combined......................................................312

Figure 4-63 Clutter ID description after maps are combined.........................................................314

Figure 4-64 Prediction figure of the combined map.......................................................................315

Figure 4-65 Format of the Projection file.......................................................................................316

Figure 4-66 Setting the projection system (1).................................................................................317

Figure 4-67 Setting the projection system (2).................................................................................317

Figure 4-68 Setting the projection system (3).................................................................................318

Figure 4-69 Selecting a coordinate system.....................................................................................318

Figure 4-70 Cell table.....................................................................................................................319

Figure 4-71 Selecting the properties to be displayed......................................................................319

Figure 4-72 Performing the rollback on the GIS map....................................................................320

Figure 4-73 Custom fields (1).........................................................................................................320

Figure 4-74 Custom fields (2).........................................................................................................321

Figure 4-75 Custom fields (3).........................................................................................................322

Figure 4-76 Custom fields (4).........................................................................................................323

Figure 4-77 Searching for NEs (1)..................................................................................................324

Figure 4-78 Searching for NEs (2)..................................................................................................324

Figure 4-79 Moving a site to a higher location (1).........................................................................325

Figure 4-80 Moving a site to a higher location (2).........................................................................325

Figure 4-81 Moving a site to a higher location (3).........................................................................326

Figure 4-82 Viewing the terrain profile (1).....................................................................................326

Figure 4-83 Viewing the terrain profile (2).....................................................................................327

Figure 4-84 Distance measurement (1)...........................................................................................327

Figure 4-85 Distance measurement (2)...........................................................................................328

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xviii of 474

Page 20: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 4-86 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata parameter window.............................................................329

Figure 4-87 Clutter Related Cost Hata parameter window.............................................................330

Figure 4-88 Clutter Related Okumura Hata parameter window.....................................................330

Figure 4-89 SPM parameter window..............................................................................................331

Figure 4-90 ITURP parameter window...........................................................................................332

Figure 4-91 Keenan-Motley parameter window.............................................................................333

Figure 4-92 Volcano model setting (1)............................................................................................334

Figure 4-93 Volcano model setting (2)............................................................................................335

Figure 4-94 Volcano model setting (3)............................................................................................336

Figure 4-95 Volcano model setting (4)............................................................................................337

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page xix of 474

Page 21: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

LTE U-Net Operation Guide

1 Overview

The U-Net is a type of wireless network planning software developed by Huawei. The U-Net runs on the Windows operating system and supports both 2G and 3G technologies. The user interface is flexible.

1.1 Interface IntroductionFigure 1-1 shows the main interface of the U-Net.

Figure 1-1 Main interface of the U-Net

Explorer window: The Explorer window is used to display the project information. The Explorer window is organized into four sections, GEO, Data, Network, and Operation. You can choose Window > Project Information to hide or display the project information.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 1 of 474

Page 22: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

GEO tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to vectors (polygons, points, and lines), and electrical maps.

Data tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to propagation models, services, traffic, and antennas.

Network tab page ( ): manages all network element (NE) parameters, such as Site, Transceiver, Cell, Repeater, Frequency Band, and Equipment.

Operation tab page ( ): manages data and operations related to the simulation and planning.

Map window: displays map data, sites, cells, vectors such as polygons, points, and lines, and planning results.

Task tool bar: indicates various tool buttons on the tool bar and plays functions such as deploying base stations, automatically deploying base stations, moving a map, zooming in or zooming out on the map, and drawing vectors (polygons, points, and lines).

System status bar: displays geodetic coordinate, longitude/latitude coordinate, clutter class, and altitude corresponding to the current cursor, the number of deployed base station, and the number of deployed cells.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 2 of 474

Page 23: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

1.2 U-Net Planning Procedure

Figure 1-1 U-Net planning procedure

Figure 1-1 shows the basic operation procedure for a complete planning project. During the planning and the simulation, set all parameters to avoid unnecessary faults by referring to the following steps:

1. Start the U-Net and choose File > New. On the displayed Project Templates window, choose LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD to create a simulation project.

2. Set the map coordinate system and imports the maps named Clutter, Height, Building, and Vector. Set the model standard deviation and indoor penetration loss based on the clutter.

3. Set the propagation model.

4. Import the antenna data: Import the antenna data independently or in batches according to the actual situation.

5. Define device properties such as site devices, Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA), and antenna feeders.

6. Import site information.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 3 of 474

Page 24: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

7. Import and edit transceiver information.

8. Define the frequency band.

9. Import and edit the cell information.

10. Set traffic parameters, including the service type, terminal and mobility, user behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps. Default settings of the U-Net can be used if no special requirements are specified.

User behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps are not required to be set if the environment-based traffic maps are not prepared or the simulation is not performed.

11. Set parameters of the reception equipment, including uplink/downlink Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) and demodulation threshold. Default settings of the U-Net can be used if no special requirements are specified.

12. Perform the simulation. Skip this step if no simulation is required.

13. Perform the frequency/neighboring cell/PCI/PRACH/RF/TAC planning. Skip this step if no planning is required.

14. Perform the coverage prediction.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 4 of 474

Page 25: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

2 U-Net Operations

This chapter describes the procedure for creating a complete project in the U-Net.

2.1 Creating a ProjectStart the U-Net. Click the button for creating a project on the upper left window or choose File > New. The Project Templates window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Creating a LTE project (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 5 of 474

Page 26: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Creating a LTE project (2)

In the displayed Project Templates window, there are five network systems, namely, CDMA, GSM, UMTS, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD. Select LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD and click OK to create a new LTE project, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Creating a LTE project (3)

2.2 Importing Map DataThe U-Net supports the import of map data both by layer and by choosing Quick Import. The U-Net supports the import of digital maps in standard planet, grc/grd, bil, and tab formats for the planning and supports the import of digital maps in shp and mif formats as the GEO information. The U-Net supports the following layers:

Clutter (clutter information, such as open and water).

Height (altitude information).

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 6 of 474

Page 27: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Building (building height information).

Vector (vector information, such as highroads and railways).

Geometry (vector information). Essentially, the information is the same as that on the Vector map. Information in this layer does not participate in the calculation and is used for demonstration only.

Text layer (vector point information, for example, institutions such as markets and schools that can be represented in vector points).

Satellite layer (picture information, such as satellite pictures and Google pictures).

The most frequently-used layers that affect the accuracy of the simulation are the Clutter layer, Height layer, and Building layer. When the ray propagation model is used, besides the preceding necessary layers, the Vector layer is mandatory. In this scenario, the 3D Vector layer is recommended. In other scenarios, the Vector layer is used for demonstration only. In the U-Net, other layers, such as the Geometry layer, Text layer, and Satellite Layer, are used for demonstration only and do not affect the simulation and planning.

2.2.1 Importing Map Data QuicklyThe map data in standard planet format can be quickly imported to the U-Net using the quick import function. The U-Net can intelligently identify each layer and automatically sets the coordinate system based on the map information.

Maps in standard planet format include the Height layer, Clutter layer, Building layer, Vector layer. Generally, the projection.txt file indicates the file for saving the projection information and is saved in the Height layer. The procedure for quickly importing the map data is as follows:

Step 1 Switch to the GEO tab page.

Figure 2-1 Importing the map data (1)

Step 2 Right-click Map in the navigation tree and choose Quick Import.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 7 of 474

Page 28: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing the map data (2)

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, browse the root directory of the map or directly enter the complete absolute path of the map. Then, click OK.

Figure 2-1 Importing the map data (3)

Step 4 On the displayed Import Map window, the map file information that is automatically read by the U-Net is displayed. You can modify the path,

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 8 of 474

Page 29: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

choose not to import a grid layer, or manually modify the projection information. Then, click OK.

Figure 2-1 Importing the map data (4)

Step 5 The effect after a map file is imported is shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing the map data (5)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 9 of 474

Page 30: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

----End

2.2.2 Importing Map Data by LayerExcept for maps in planet format, maps in other formats supported by the U-Net must be imported by layer. If the latitude and longitude information is used during the planning, you need to manually set the projection system.

Setting the Coordinate System

Switch to the GEO tab page. Right-click Map in the navigation tree and choose Coordinate.

Figure 2-1 Setting the coordinate

Select a proper coordinate system record based on the map information. Select a corresponding coordinate system group from the Find in drop-down list based on the continent on the map. Select a proper coordinate system based on the nation/region on the map together with the Region column. Then, determine the coordinate system based on the central longitude.

After selecting the required coordinate system record, click Properties to view the coordinate system information and click Apply to apply the selected coordinate system to the project.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 10 of 474

Page 31: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Selecting a projection

Importing a Clutter Layer

The U-Net supports clutter layers in planet, grc, bil, and tab formats. The procedure for importing a Clutter layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Clutter under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a Clutter layer

Step 2 Select the Clutter map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 11 of 474

Page 32: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing a Clutter file

Figure 2-2 Effect after a Clutter is imported

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 12 of 474

Page 33: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Importing a Height Layer

The U-Net supports Height layers in planet, grd, bil, and tab formats. The procedure for importing a Heights layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Heights under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a Height layer

Step 2 Select the Height map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 13 of 474

Page 34: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing a Height file

Figure 2-2 Effect after a Height file is imported

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 14 of 474

Page 35: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

----End

Importing a Building Layer

The U-Net supports Building layers in planet and bil formats. The procedure for importing a Building layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Buildings under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a Building file

Step 2 Select the Building map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 15 of 474

Page 36: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing a Building file

Figure 2-2 Effect after a Building file is imported

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 16 of 474

Page 37: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Importing a Vector Layer

The U-Net supports Vector layers in planet and tab formats. The procedure for importing a Vector layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Vector under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a Vector layer

Step 2 Select the Vector map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 17 of 474

Page 38: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing a Vector file

Figure 2-2 Effect after a Vector file is imported

Importing a Geometry Map

The U-Net supports Geometry layers in shp and mif formats. The procedure for importing a Geometry layer is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 18 of 474

Page 39: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Step 1 Right-click Geometry under Map in the navigation tree. Then, choose Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a Geometry layer

Step 2 Select the Geometry map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1:

Figure 2-1 Importing a Geometry file

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 19 of 474

Page 40: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Effect after a Geometry file is imported

----End

Importing a Text Map

The U-Net supports text layers in planet formats. The procedure for importing a text layer is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Text under Map in the navigation tree. Then, click Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a text map

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 20 of 474

Page 41: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Step 2 Select the text map file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a text map

Figure 2-2 Effect after a text map is imported

----End

Importing a Satellite Picture

The U-Net supports the import of satellite pictures in png, bmp, and jpg formats. When importing a satellite picture, you need to set the latitude and longitude or geodetic coordinate of the location in the picture to match the

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 21 of 474

Page 42: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

actual location in the map. The procedure for importing a satellite picture is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Satellite under Map in the navigation tree. Then, click Import, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a satellite picture

Step 2 Select the satellite file to be imported and click Open, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Importing a satellite picture

Step 3 Set the location of the picture. After a picture is imported, the property setting window is automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 22 of 474

Page 43: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Setting the coordinate location of a satellite picture

Bound Type: Bound Type can be set to Long/Lat or X/Y. Long/Lat indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are longitude/latitude coordinates. X/Y indicates that the coordinates at the boundary are geodetic coordinates.

West: indicates the western boundary of a satellite map and is either a longitude/latitude coordinate or a geodetic coordinate.

North: indicates the northern boundary of a satellite map and is either a longitude/latitude coordinate or a geodetic coordinate.

East: indicates the eastern boundary of a satellite map and is either a longitude/latitude coordinate or a geodetic coordinate.

South: indicates the southern boundary of a satellite map and is either a longitude/latitude coordinate or a geodetic coordinate.

Transparency: indicates the transparency of a satellite map.

Move the cursor to the picture. When appears, drag the cursor to adjust the position of the picture.

Move the cursor to the boundary of the picture. When or appears, drag the cursor to adjust the size of the picture.

After the preceding settings are complete, click OK. The effect is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 23 of 474

Page 44: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Effect after a satellite map is imported

----End

2.2.3 Map CalibrationAfter a map is imported, the location of a layer can be manually adjusted by using the map calibration function if the Clutter layer, Height layer, or Building layer have location deviation with each other, or have location deviation with the imported engineering parameters. For details about how to use the map correction function, see section 4.5 "Propagation Model Calibration."

2.2.4 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode

After a map is imported, you can select a mode for displaying the coordinate system on the GIS map (displaying longitude/latitude coordinates or displaying geodetic coordinates). The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Map in the navigation tree and choose Map Setting.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 24 of 474

Page 45: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Setting the coordinate format of a map

Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, select a coordinate display mode. There are four display modes, including geodetic coordinates and longitude/latitude coordinates (three display modes of longitude/latitude coordinates). You can also set the decimal digits of the displayed longitude/latitude in longitude/latitude coordinates in the status bar.

Figure 2-1 Setting the coordinate format of a map

Parameters in the Coordinate Setting dialog box are as follows:

Coordinate Style

− xy reference frame: indicates the display mode of geodetic coordinates.

− xxdxxmxx.xxxsS: indicates the display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates in the format of xx degree.xx minute.xx second, such as 105°31'57''.

− xx.xxxxS: indicates the ESWN display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates, such as 106.61E.

− -xx.xxxx: indicates the negative/positive display mode of longitude/latitude coordinates. West longitudes and south latitudes are

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 25 of 474

Page 46: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

displayed as negative longitudes; east longitudes and north latitudes are displayed as positive coordinates.

BL Style Precision: When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates.

2.2.5 Setting Map ParametersAfter a map is imported, you need to set clutter parameters to make the simulation result more accurate. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane, right-click GEO under Map and choose Parameter Management.

Figure 2-1 Clutter parameter setting (1)

Step 2 The Clutter Parameters Display window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 26 of 474

Page 47: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Clutter parameter setting (2)

Parameters on the Actual Value tab page are as follows:

Code: indicates the number of a clutter class. The value depends on the geographic data.

Name: indicates the name of a clutter class. The value depends on the geographic data.

Clutter Height: indicates the average height of clutters of each type and is mainly used to calculate the impact of the clutter height on the path loss.

Spatial Multiplexer Factor: indicates the spatial multiplexing factor. Usually, the default value is 1 and it is unnecessary to change the parameter value. This parameter is not directly related to the Multiple-Input Multiple-Out-put (MIMO). However, this parameter, together with the MIMO gain, participates in the calculation of peak throughput on the downlink traffic channel. By default, the default value of this parameter is used.

Penetration Loss: indicates the penetration loss of clutters of each type. This parameter needs to be set as required in the scenario of indoor simulation and participates in the calculation of link loss. The parameter value provided in this document is an experience value. The parameter value varies according to the actual situation. Generally, each subregion has its own experience value.

Model Standard deviation: indicates the standard deviation of the slow fading margin. This parameter is used for the calculation of the receiving power. The parameter value provided in this document is an experience value and can be changed according to the actual situation.

Shadow Corr: indicates the factor of shadow fading. The default value is 0.5.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 27 of 474

Page 48: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

C/(I+N) Standard deviation: indicates the standard deviation based on C/(I + N) and reflects the impact of the shadow fading on C/(I + N). Usually, the value of C/(I+N) Standard deviation is 2 to 4 dB smaller than that of Model Standard deviation. This parameter participates in the calculation of the Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) and is used to adjust parameters covering the prediction of Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) counters.

You need to pay attention to the values of Penetration Loss and Model Standard deviation corresponding to each clutter type. For other parameters, use the default values. Model Standard Deviation is set according to the normal standard deviation of the shadow fading. You can refer to the default value for the link. C/(I+N) Standard Deviation is used to calculate the standard deviation of the shadow fading during the SINR. Generally, the value of C/(I+N) Standard Deviation is 2 to 4 dB smaller than that of Model Standard Deviation to achieve better SINR prediction results.

----End

2.3 Importing and Setting Engineering Parameters

2.3.1 Setting Propagation ModelsThe U-Net provides multiple propagation models, such as Okumura-Hata model, Cost-Hata model, SPM model (standard propagation model defined by the U-Net), ITU RP model, Keenan-Montly mode, and Volcano models. Before using Volcano modes, you need to install Volcano plug-ins and purchase license files. Currently, the U-Net supports Volcano 3.0. When performing the planning simulation, you need to set different propagation model parameters based on different scenarios and areas. Table 2-1 describes the application scenarios of propagation models in the U-Net.

Table 2-1 Application scenarios of propagation models in the U-Net

Propagation Model

Band Factor Configuration Requirements

Recommended Application Scenario

Cost-Hata model (including the Cost-Hata HW model)

1500 MHz to 2000 MHz

Terrain condition.

Clutter statistics.

A formula corresponds to a clutter.

Whether to calculate the diffraction.

Limited by the free space loss.

Loss in municipal areas.

1 km < Cell radius < 20 km

Applicable to the GSM1800, UMTS, and LTE technologies.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 28 of 474

Page 49: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Propagation Model

Band Factor Configuration Requirements

Recommended Application Scenario

Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings.

Usually used for coverage prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.

Okumura Hata model (including the Okumura Hata HW model)

150 MHz to 2000 MHz

Terrain condition.

Clutter statistics.

A formula corresponds to a clutter.

Whether to calculate the diffraction.

Limited by the free space loss.

Loss in municipal areas.

1 km < Cell radius < 20 km

Applicable to the GSM900, CDMA2000, and LTE technologies.

Not applicable to highly populated urban areas but applicable to common urban areas, suburbs, and villages. In addition, the

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 29 of 474

Page 50: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Propagation Model

Band Factor Configuration Requirements

Recommended Application Scenario

antenna of the base station must be higher than the surrounding buildings.

Usually used for coverage prediction and rarely used for capacity simulation.

SPM model (including the SPM900 and SPM2G models)

150 MHz to 2000 MHz

Terrain condition.

Clutter statistics.

Effective antenna height.

There are six methods of calculating the effective antenna height.

The diffraction weight is differentiated in the case of LOS or NLOS.

Limited by the free space loss.

Loss and weight of each type of clutter.

Clearance area of the receiver.

0.5 km < Cell radius < 20 km

Applicable to the GSM900, GSM1800, UMTS, CDMA2000, WiMAX, and LTE technologies.

Compared with the Hata models, the SPM models are widely applicable to the scenarios of macro cells.

Widely used for capacity simulation.

ITURP model (that is, 1238 model)

1800 MHz to 2000 MHz

Distance (LOS and NLOS) and frequency.

Margin of slow

Propagation scenarios are classified into LOS and NLOS scenarios.

The margin of slow

Indoor scenarios.

Used only for

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 30 of 474

Page 51: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Propagation Model

Band Factor Configuration Requirements

Recommended Application Scenario

fading.

NLOS considers the loss in penetration through floors in different environments. The loss depends on the number of penetrated floors.

NLOS considers the distance loss coefficient N.

fading depends on the requirement on the coverage probability and the standard deviation of indoor slow fading.

In the cases of residential buildings, office buildings, and malls, N is 28, 30, and 22, respectively.

the coverage prediction.

Keenan-Motley

Around 2000 MHz

Distance and frequency.

Loss in penetration through walls.

Number of walls.

The impact of multi-path propagation is not considered. The penetration loss of each wall is the same.

Indoor scenarios.

Used only for the coverage prediction.

Volcano 2G, 3G, and 4G frequency bands

Distance and frequency.

Loss in penetration through walls.

Comprehensively consider the impact of multi-path propagation such as reflection and diffraction during the propagation of wireless signals among buildings.

When the multi-path propagation is enabled, the building information must be available for assisting the calculation.

Densely populated urban areas with many buildings.

When conditions permit, you can obtain accurate parameters by using the propagation model calibration function. For details about the method of using the propagation model calibration function, see section 4.4 "Print." If the propagation model calibration function cannot be used, you can select the default propagation model in the U-Net to perform the simulation based on

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 31 of 474

Page 52: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

the band and scenario. The procedure for setting the propagation model is as follows:

Step 1 Click Data to switch to the Data tab page. Then, unfold the Propagation Models node.

Figure 2-1 Setting the propagation model (1)

Step 2 Unfold subnodes under Propagation Models to select a propagation model for a concrete scenario. Take the setting of the Cost231-Hata model as an example. Right-click Cost231-Hata and choose Properties or double-click Cost231-Hata. The dialog box for setting propagation model parameters is displayed.

Figure 2-1 Setting the propagation model (2)

You can manually modify parameters or calculation formulas by clicking Formula. For details about parameters for propagation modes of each type, see Appendix 4.12.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 32 of 474

Page 53: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

2.3.2 Importing and Modifying Antenna Information

The U-Net supports the import of antenna files in .msi (a general antenna format accepted by the industry), .txt (a format supported by the U-Net), and .iAntes (a format supported by the U-Net) formats.

Msi indicates files with the suffix of msi. A MSI file corresponds to antennas of one type.

The U-Net supports the import of the MSI files of the following formats:

Figure 2-1 Formats of MSI antenna files

Txt indicates the files in plain text formats. A TXT file corresponds to antennas of one type.

The format of .txt files that can be imported by the U-Net is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 33 of 474

Page 54: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Format of a .txt antenna file

IAntes: A iAntes file corresponds to antennas of one group.

The procedure for importing an antenna file is as follows:

Step 1 Click Data to switch to the Data tab page. Unfold the Antennas node.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 34 of 474

Page 55: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing antenna information

Step 2 Right-click Antennas and choose Import. You can also perform other operations such as creating an antenna file, opening an antenna worksheet, sequencing the data, and exporting the data.

Figure 2-1 Importing/exporting antenna information

Step 3 On the displayed Import Antenna Files dialog box, select the format (txt/mis/iAntes) of antenna files to be imported. You can import multiple files at the same time.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 35 of 474

Page 56: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Antenna file

The U-Net allows the import of antenna files with the same name but automatically adds digital suffixes to file names. When importing an antenna file, the U-Net does not read antenna names contained in the file but names the antenna based on the name of the imported antenna file.

The U-Net is format sensitive. If the file formats are not supported by the U-Net, errors may easily occur. After obtaining antenna files, you are advised to open these files to check whether their formats are supported by the U-Net. Modify the file formats if the file formats are not supported by the U-Net.

The number of antenna files whose formats are fully supported by the U-Net is small. Therefore, the success rate is low if these files are directly imported to the U-Net. You are advised to manually edit the file formats. Copy a built-in antenna file of the U-Net, copy and paste the angle shading value of the target antenna to the antenna file, and fill in related information.

Step 4 View or change the antenna information.

After the antenna information is imported, you can view or change the antenna information by double-clicking an antenna file or right-clicking an antenna file and choose Properties to display the antenna property window:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 36 of 474

Page 57: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Viewing the antenna property

Figure 2-2 Antenna property window

Parameters in the antenna property window are described as follows:

General tab page

− Name: indicates the name of an antenna.

− Manufacturer: indicates the vendor of an antenna.

− Gain: indicates the antenna gain.

− Pattern Electrical Tilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna.

− Comments: indicates the comments of an antenna.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 37 of 474

Page 58: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Horizontal Pattern/Vertical Pattern tab page: displays the attenuation value at the horizontal/vertical angle of an antenna.

− Angle: indicates the angle of an antenna.

− Attenuation: indicates the attenuation value at the horizontal/vertical angle of an antenna.

Other Properties tab page

− Beamwidth: indicates the antenna beamwidth.

− Max Frequency: indicates the maximum frequency of an antenna.

− Min Frequency: indicates the minimal frequency of an antenna.

----End

2.3.3 Setting Site Equipment Parameters

Setting the Site Equipment

Site Equipment is mainly refers to the noise coefficient on the base station side. The operation procedure is as follows:

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Equipment > Site Equipment. The Site Equipment window is displayed.

Figure 2-1 Setting the Site Equipment (1)

Figure 2-2 Setting the Site Equipment (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 38 of 474

Page 59: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Parameters are described as follows:

Name: indicates the name of a device.

Noise Figure(db): indicates the static noise coefficient of the cabinet top.

2.3.4 Importing Site Information

Importing Site Information

After engineering parameters are configured based on the template, these engineering parameters can be directly imported to the U-Net. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Site and choose Import….

Figure 2-1 Importing site information (1)

Step 2 After a site file is clicked, the Data Import window is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 39 of 474

Page 60: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Importing site information (2)

In the Field Mapping worksheet, data in the Source column is obtained from the source file of the site. Data in the Destination column indicates the names of site parameters used by the U-Net. If an imported parameter name is included in the names provided in the Destination column, the Destination column automatically matches the names. If the name is excluded in the names provided in the Destination column, IGNORE is displayed in the cell of the Destination column. You can manually select the value of the cell to match the fields provided by the U-Net. For example, Site Name of the imported file is automatically matched to the Site Name field of the U-Net. The ID name is not a parameter provided by the U-Net. You can manually match the ID name to the Site ID field of the U-Net. You are advised to export an empty template and then import NE parameters to the U-Net after these parameters are edited based on the template. In this way, the efficiency is improved.

Before importing site information to the U-Net, set the coordinate system (or correctly import the electrical map) if only the latitude and longitude information is available. Otherwise, site information fails to be imported.

Update Records indicates whether the existing site data in a project is replaced. The 1st. Data Row parameter is used to set the line from which the data is imported. The Field Separator parameter is used to set the separator of the field.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 40 of 474

Page 61: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Viewing Site Information

You can view site information after importing site information to the U-Net. The operation procedure is as follows:

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Site and choose Open Table.

Figure 2-1 Viewing site information (1)

Figure 2-2 Viewing site information (2)

The data imported to the site must contain the Name field (that is, the site name) and the site names cannot be repeated. Other fields can be imported as required. The U-Net provides the default values for fields that are not imported.

Parameters in the site worksheet are as follows:

Site Name: indicates the name of a site and is the unique identification of the site. The U-Net automatically enters the default name of each new site.

Site ID: indicates the ID of a site. This parameter is customized by network planning engineers.

X: indicates the geodetic coordinate X.

Y: indicates the geodetic coordinate Y.

Longitude: indicates the longitude coordinate.

Latitude: indicates the longitude coordinate.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 41 of 474

Page 62: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Comment: indicates the comments of a site.

Setting the Display Mode of a Site

After site information is imported, you can set the display size and display mode of a site on the Geographic Information System (GIS) map. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Site in the navigation tree and choose Display Setting. The Display Field window for setting the display mode is displayed. In the Display Field window, you can set the display mode of a site on the GIS map.

Figure 2-1 Setting the display mode of a site

Figure 2-2 Label Display tab page in the Display Field window

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 42 of 474

Page 63: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Step 2 On the Label Display tab page, you can set the site parameters displayed on the map. For example, if Name and Altitude are set to be displayed, name and altitude of the site are displayed on the map, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Effect after labels are set

Step 3 On the Group By Display tab page, you can set the display mode of sites of each group after these sites are divided into different groups.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 43 of 474

Page 64: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Default displaying setting of sites and group division setting

Step 4 Select whether Display Type is set to GroupBy.

Figure 2-1 Setting the display mode

The worksheet displays the display mode of the current group. Click the cell in the first column. The dialog box for setting the display mode is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, you can set the display mode of the site on the GIS map.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 44 of 474

Page 65: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

2.3.5 Importing Transceiver Information

Importing Transceiver Information

After transceiver engineering parameters are configured based on the template, engineering parameters can be directly imported to the U-Net. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Import.

Figure 2-1 Importing transceiver information (1)

If multiple antennas are available under a transceiver, you can configure antennas with either of the following methods:

Step 2 Switch to the Antenna Config tab page to set multiple antennas, as shown in Figure 2-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 45 of 474

Page 66: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Antenna setting (1)

Step 3 Right-click Transceiver and choose Antennas > Open Table. Then, set the antenna information in the displayed antenna worksheet.

Figure 2-1 Antenna setting (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 46 of 474

Page 67: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Antenna setting (3)

Only non-main antennas can be displayed and set in the worksheet. Main antennas are not displayed in the worksheet. You can modify or switch to the main antennas on the dialog box for setting the property of the transceiver.

Transceiver Name: indicates the name of a transceiver.

Sector ID: indicates the sector ID of an antenna. It is customized by the user.

Antenna ID: indicates the ID of an antenna. Together with Transceiver Name, Antenna ID is the unique identification of a record.

Dx(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.

Dy(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.

Antenna: indicates the type of an antenna.

Height(m): indicates the height of an antenna. The unit is meter.

Power Ratio: indicates the power ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Azimuth: indicates the antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt: indicates the mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

----End

Viewing Transceiver Information

You can view transceiver information after transceiver information is imported. The operation procedure is as follows:

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 47 of 474

Page 68: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Transceiver setting (1)

By default, all loss parameters and sending/receiving antenna ports are hidden in the Transceiver worksheet. You can run the Display Columns command to manually unhide these parameters.

Parameters in the Transceiver worksheet are described as follows:

Site Name: indicates the name of a site.

Transceiver Name: indicates the name of a transceiver and is the unique identification of a transceiver.

Dx(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.

Dy(m): indicates the offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antenna belongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.

Antenna: indicates the type of an antenna. The default value is determined based on the antennas in the U-Net. By default, the first antenna is displayed.

Height(m): indicates the height of an antenna. The unit is meter.

Azimuth: indicates the antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt: indicates the mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt: indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Power Ratio: indicates the power ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Comments: indicates the comments of the transceiver.

You can double-click the head of the transceiver worksheet to view the detailed property of the transceiver in the displayed Transceiver Properties window.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 48 of 474

Page 69: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Transceiver setting (2)

Setting the Transceiver Display

The procedures for setting Group By and Display Setting of the transceiver are similar to those of a site. The procedures are not described in details.

2.3.6 Setting the Frequency BandDifferent frequency bands and bandwidths are defined according to requirements of planning projects. The defined frequency band information is applied to the Cell worksheet.

The U-Net supports the setting of frequency bands from the worksheet or the property window. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Set the frequency band in the worksheet.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 49 of 474

Page 70: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Frequency band setting (1)

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Frequency Band > Open Table. The frequency band worksheet is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Frequency band setting (2)

The number of ARFCNs that can be used for the U-Net depends on the setting of Start /End Channel Index.

Parameters in the frequency worksheet are described as follows:

Band Number: indicates a frequency band number.

Name: indicates the name of a frequency band.

Bandwidth(MHz): indicates the bandwidth.

Start Channel Index: indicates the start index of the available ARFCNs corresponding to a frequency band.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 50 of 474

Page 71: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

End Channel Index: indicates the end index of the available ARFCNs corresponding to a band.

Excluded Channels: indicates the index of an excluded channel.

Frequency(DL)(MHz): indicates the downlink ARFCN.

Frequency(UL)(MHz): indicates the uplink ARFCN.

ACIR: indicates the adjacent channel signal-to-interference ratio.

In the frequency band worksheet, you can perform the following operations:

Modify the frequency band property:

Modify the value of the cell in the frequency band worksheet. The setting of the current cell takes effect after you click any other cell. You can also press Ctrl+D to change multiple rows of data in a column or press Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V to copy and paste multiple cells.

Delete a frequency band:

Click the table head of data in a row and click Delete or right-click the data and choose Delete to delete the frequency band. The frequency band quoted by a cell or site template cannot be deleted.

Add a frequency band.

Click the last empty row of the worksheet and add the property data to be set. The U-Net provides default values for cells that are not filled with any data. Then, click other rows of the worksheet to generate new frequency bands.

Step 2 Set the frequency band from the property window.

Figure 2-1 Frequency band setting (3)

In the displayed frequency band worksheet, double-click the head of frequency band data of a row. The property window corresponding to data of the row is displayed. You can modify properties of the frequency band in the property window. Click OK to save the modifications or click Cancel to not to save the modifications.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 51 of 474

Page 72: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

----End

2.3.7 Importing Cell Information

Importing Cell Information

After cell engineering parameters are configured based on the template, these engineering parameters can be directly imported to the U-Net. The operation procedure is as follows:

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Cells > Import.

Figure 2-1 Importing cell information (1)

The cell data to be imported must contain the following fields: Transceiver: indicates the name of a transceiver to which a cell belongs. Name: indicates the name of a cell.

If the cell data to be imported does not contain the preceding fields, the cell data fails to be imported. Other fields can be imported as required. The U-Net provides the default values for fields that are not imported. Before importing cell information, site and transceiver information must have been set by sequence. Note: The frequency band name to be imported to the worksheet must be consistent with the frequency band name set by the U-Net. In addition, pay attention to the space character.

Viewing Cell Information

You can view cell information after cell information is imported to the U-Net. The operation procedure is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 52 of 474

Page 73: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, click to switch to the Network tab page. Right-click Transceiver and choose Cells > Open Table. The cell worksheet is displayed.

Figure 2-1 Cell parameter setting (1)

The cell worksheet contains a lot of parameters. You can set related parameters based on the required simulation calculation, such as neighboring cell planning, capacity simulation, and coverage prediction. You can view the related parameter classification by right-clicking the cell worksheet and choosing Display Columns, as shown in Figure 2-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 53 of 474

Page 74: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Cell parameter setting (2)

Parameters in the cell worksheet are described as follows:

Transceiver Name: indicates the name of the transceiver to which the cell belongs.

Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.

Active: indicates whether to activate the current cell.

Frequency Band: indicates the frequency band information.

Channel Index: indicates the channel.

Reception: indicates the reception equipment.

RS Power(dB): indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier. The unit is dBm.

GCI: indicates the global cell identity of a cell.

Main Propagation Model: indicates the main propagation model.

Main Calculation Radius(m): indicates the calculation radius of the main propagation model.

Main Resolution(m): indicates the calculation precision of the main propagation model.

Extended Propagation Model: indicates the extended propagation model.

Extended Calculation Radius(m): indicates the calculation radium of the extended calculation model.

Extended Resolution(m): indicates the calculation accuracy of the extended propagation model.

MCC: indicates the mobile country code (MCC).

MNC: indicates the mobile network code (MNC).

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 54 of 474

Page 75: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Cell ID: indicates the ID of a cell.

DlEarfcn: indicates a downlink ARFCN.

UlEarfcn: indicates a uplink ARFCN.

Local Cell ID: indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.

TAC Tracing Area Code: indicates the tracking area code (TAC).

Max Power(dBm): indicates the maximum transmit power.

Target Load(DL): indicates the target load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL): indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Edge Frequency Style(UL): indicates the method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the uplink.

Edge Frequency Style(DL): indicates the method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the downlink.

ICIC(UL): indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the uplink.

ICIC(DL): indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the downlink.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL): indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling function on the uplink.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL): indicates whether to enable the frequency scheduling function on the downlink.

Power Control(DL): indicates the power control on the downlink.

Max Schedule Users(UL): indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on the uplink.

Max Schedule Users(DL): indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers on the downlink.

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB): indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) on the uplink control channels.

Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol): indicates the number of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on the downlink PDCCH.

Target IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IOT) on the uplink.

PBCH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

SCH to Rs(dB): indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the power of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB): indicates the SINR access threshold of the downlink reference signal.

PB(dB): indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power.

Schedule Policy: indicates a scheduling policy.

PA(dB): indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 55 of 474

Page 76: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

CCU PA(dB): indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.

CEU PA(dB): indicates the offset of the class A signal power received by users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.

Alpha: indicates the path loss compensation coefficient. This is an open loop power control parameter.

Po(dBm): It is an open loop power control parameter.

TTI Bundling: indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.

VMIMO: indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output (VMIMO) is considered.

IRC: indicates whether the interference rejection combining (IRC) function is enabled.

COMP: indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabled on the base station.

Channel Relativity: indicates whether channel relativity is considered.

Transmission Mode: indicates the transmission mode.

Actual Load(UL): indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Actual Load(DL): indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

PCFICH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal.

PDCCH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relative to the power of the reference signal.

PHICH to RS(dB): indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQ indicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power of the reference signal.

Actual IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the actual Interfere Over Thermal (IOT) on the uplink.

Priority: indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is, the higher the priority of the cell is.

CCU IoT(dB): indicates the IoT of users in the cell center.

CEU IoT(dB): indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge.

Scene: indicates the scenario of a cell.

PCI: indicates the physical ID of a cell.

PCI Block: indicates the ID of a cell cluster.

High Speed: indicates the speed in a cell.

Radius(m): indicates the radium of a cell.

Min Root Sequence Index: indicates the minimal ZC sequence of a cell.

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor): indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on the neighboring relationship).

Reselect Priority: indicates the cell reselection priority.

Note: The preceding parameters are common parameters in both the LTE-FDD network system and the LTE-TDD network system. The LTE-TDD network systems also contain the following parameters:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 56 of 474

Page 77: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Frame Configuration: indicates the ratio of uplink sub-frames to downlink sub-frames.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS: indicates the proportion of special sub-frames.

Multi-user Beamforming: indicates whether to enable the Multi-user Beamforming function during the downlink scheduling.

2.3.8 Setting the Traffic ModelBefore performing the coverage prediction or capacity simulation, you need to create traffic data involving in the traffic models, such as service type, terminal, and mobility. Before performing the capacity simulation, you need to configure traffic maps and user behaviors and traffic environments related to traffic maps.

User behaviors, traffic environment, and traffic maps are not required to be set if the environment-based traffic maps are not prepared or the simulation is not performed.

Configuring the Mobility

On the Data tab page, choose Traffic Parameters > Mobility Types. By default, the U-Net provides mobility types of 30km/h, 50km/h, 60km/h, 90km/h, Fixed, Pedestrian, and 120km/h. These mobility types correspond to different mobility rates. For a mobility type, you can define different mobility rates.

Figure 2-1 Mobility type (1)

Right-click Mobility Types and choose New to create a mobility type. The Mobility properties dialog box is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 57 of 474

Page 78: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Mobility type (2)

Name: indicates the name of a mobility type. The default value is MobilityNumber.

Average Speed: indicates the mobility speed. The value ranges from 0 to ∞ with the default value of 0.00. The unit is km/h.

The value can be accurate to two digits after the decimal point.

You can also double-click Mobility Types or right-click Mobility Types and choose Open Table to add a new mobility type in the window.

Figure 2-3 Mobility type (3)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 58 of 474

Page 79: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Configuring the Service Type

On the Data tab page of the Project Explorer pane, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD. By default, the U-Net defines four service types.

Figure 2-1 Default service types

Create a service type: Right-click Network and choose New. The LTE Service Properties dialog box is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 59 of 474

Page 80: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 LTE Service Properties

Name: indicates the name of a service type.

Type: indicates the service type, which can be either the voice service or the data service.

GBR: indicates the GBR service if GBR is selected.

AMR Rate: indicates the rate of the voice service. The unit is kbit/s. The value can be 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, or 12.2.

Body Loss(dB): indicates the loss due to the human body. The value of this parameter varies with services. The default value is 3.00.

Priority: indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. The weighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority. The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Activity: indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required only in voice services and is not required in data services.

Max Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput.

Min Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the minimal uplink/downlink throughput.

Average Throughput(kbit/s): indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput.

Transmission Efficiency: indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate.

IBLER(%): indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to 100.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 60 of 474

Page 81: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Offset(kbit/s): indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLC layer.

After the preceding parameters are set, click OK. You can view the new service type by choosing Services > LTE-FDD.

To modify an existing service type, you can double-click the service type or right-click the service type and choose Properties to display the LTE Service Properties window.

Figure 2-3 Creating a service type

Configuring the Terminal Type

Right-click Traffic Parameters on the Project Explorer pane and choose Terminals > LTE-FDD. By default, the U-Net provides terminals of two types.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 61 of 474

Page 82: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Setting terminals

You can define multiple new terminal types according to the actual situation. You can choose Traffic Parameters > Terminal > New to define a new terminal type in the displayed LTE Terminal Properties window.

Figure 2-2 Creating a terminal type

Name: indicates the name of a terminal type.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 62 of 474

Page 83: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

UE Category: indicates the category of a terminal. The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from 1 to 5.

UL Peak Throughput(Kbps): indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.

DL Peak Throughput(Kbps): indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.

Support UL 64 QAM: indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.

Maximum Layer Number: indicates the maximum number of layers.

Min Tx Power(dBm): indicates the minimal transmit power of a terminal.

Max Tx Power(dBm): indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.

Noise Figure(dB): indicates the noise figure of a terminal.

Cable Loss(dB): indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.

UL RS Offset(dB): indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplink direction.

RB Number: indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported by the terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction. If this parameter is selected, the set parameter value is used for calculating uplink service counters during the prediction. If this parameter is not selected, the calculated value is used.

Reception Equipment: indicates the type of the reception equipment for a terminal. The reception equipment can be set by referring to the following section ‘Configuring the Demodulation Threshold Table’.

Gain(dBi): indicates the antenna gain.

Number of Transmission Antennas: indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for a terminal.

Number of Reception Antennas: indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.

Configuring the Demodulation Threshold Table

You need to configure the demodulation threshold table on the reception equipment of the terminal if you need to calculate the throughput of uplink/downlink traffic channels during the prediction or coverage simulation.

Select LTE-FDD under Terminals on the Project Explorer pane. Right-click Reception Equipment to view the defined reception equipment.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 63 of 474

Page 84: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Defining the reception equipment

Name: indicates the name of the reception equipment.

MCS Table: indicates the MCS bearer table corresponding to the reception equipment.

The MCS bearer table of the U-Net is the same as that in the protocol. Generally, you do not need to configure the MCS bearer table. If the MCS bearer table in the protocol changes, you can view and edit contents of the MCS bearer table with the following method:

On the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE-FDD under Services and choose PUSCH MCS to display the MCS bearer table. Then, you can view and edit the contents of the MCS bearer table.

Figure 2-2 Displaying the MCS bearer table

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 64 of 474

Page 85: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-3 MCS bearer table

Parameters are described as follows:

Index: indicates the index of an MCS.

Highest Modulation: indicates a modulation scheme, which can be QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM. The default value is QPSK.

Modulation: indicates a modulation order.

Coding Rate: indicates the coding rate. The value ranges from 0 to 2.

Bearer: indicates the bearer efficiency. Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulation order

After the receiving type is defined in the preceding step, double-click the boundary on the left of the receiving type (define the left arrow of the receiving device). The demodulation threshold table of the reception equipment is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Default UE Reception Equipment Properties

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 65 of 474

Page 86: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Mobility: indicates a mobility type.

MIMO: indicates the MIMO mode.

IBLER(%): indicates the error block rate.

Channel Relativity: indicates the channel relativity.

Transmission Mode: indicates the transmission mode of the cell. This parameter is available only in the downlink demodulation threshold table.

MCS Threshold: indicates the demodulation threshold of data/voice services. You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCS bearer information in the Demodulation area, as shown in Figure 2-5. The X axis (in the horizontal direction) indicates the SINR. The Y axis (in the vertical direction) indicates the spectrum efficiency.

By default, the U-Net has been configured with multiple MIMO configurations and demodulation threshold tables under mobility conditions. The receding data sources from Huawei products can satisfy general requirements. The demodulation threshold table is Huawei confidential and has been incorporated to the U-Net. You do not need to modify the demodulation threshold table. In addition, you cannot edit the demodulation threshold table. For special MIMO configurations or mobility speeds, you can create a new demodulation threshold table after obtaining the mapping between the SINR and the spectrum efficiency.

Right-click the table and choose Import/Export to import/export the data. Counters in the table are described as follows:

Figure 2-5 Bear Index/Ec/Nt mapping table

SINR: indicates the SINR. The unit is dB.

Spectrum Efficiency: indicates the efficiency of the spectrum.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 66 of 474

Page 87: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Configuring User Behaviors

Choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles on the Project Explorer pane. By default, the U-Net provides user behaviors of two types, Business User and Standard User. You can customize various user behaviors based on different scenarios and different user types.

Figure 2-1 Default types of user behaviors

Right-click User Profiles and choose New to display the User Profile Properties window, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Creating a user behavior (1)

Parameters are described as follows:

Name: indicates the name of a user behavior.

Priority: indicates the priority of a user. The default value is 1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 67 of 474

Page 88: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Service: indicates a service type.

For voice services:

Calls/hour: indicates the number of calls per hour.

Duration: indicates the average duration of a call. The unit is second.

Network usage = Calls/hour x Duration(s)/3600 = Erlang of a subscriber

For data services:

Calls/hour: indicates the data traffic volume received by a terminal per hour.

Network usage = (Calls/hour x (useful volume(kbytes)/8/call)/Efficiency factor)/nominal rate(kbit/s)

Volume(UL)(KB): indicates the uplink rate.

Volume(DL)(KB): indicates the downlink rate.

You need to set the preceding table only when the grid map is created based on the traffic environment, the vector map is created based on the user behavior, and the clutter map serves as the traffic map.

Click OK to generate the corresponding user type under User Profiles, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Creating a user behavior (2)

You can compare one or more user types. Right-click User Profiles and choose Compare User Profiles Elements to select the user type to be compared. Click Compare to display the User Profiles Compare Result window, as shown in Figure 2-5.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 68 of 474

Page 89: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-4 Comparing user behaviors (1)

Figure 2-5 Comparing user behaviors (2)

You can change the property of a single user type in the User Profiles Compare Result window.

Configuring the Traffic Environment

On the Data tab page, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments. By default, the U-Net provides four traffic environment types, Dense Urban, Urban, Suburban, and Rural to represent geographical features of the traffic environments of the four types. You can define the number of subscribers in traffic environments of each type. In addition, you can customize the traffic environment based on the actual situation.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 69 of 474

Page 90: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Environments (1)

Right-click Environments and choose New. The Environment Properties window is displayed. You can set some basic properties and clutter weighted parameters, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Environments (2)

Name: indicates the name of an environment type.

User: indicates the user type.

Mobility: indicates a mobility type.

Density(Subscribers/km2): indicates the subscriber density, that is, the number of subscribers per square kilometer. The unit is number/km2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 70 of 474

Page 91: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-3 Environments (3)

Clutter Class: indicates the name of a clutter. It is related to the imported geographical data.

Weight: indicates the weight of clutters of each type and is used to calculate the number of subscribers allocated to clutters of each type.

% Indoor: indicates the percentage of indoor subscribers in clutters of each type.

Click OK to generate the corresponding traffic environment, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Environments (4)

You can compare multiple traffic environments. Right-click Environments and choose Compare Environment Elements. The Environment Compare window is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 71 of 474

Page 92: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-5 Comparing traffic environments (1)

Select the traffic environments to be compared from the Select Environments check box, and select the comparison items from the Environment Items check box. Then, click Compare to display the Environment Compare Result window. You can modify the setting of the environment properties in the Environment Compare Result window.

Figure 2-6 Comparing traffic environments (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 72 of 474

Page 93: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

2.3.9 Configuring a Traffic MapBefore performing the capacity simulation, you need to configure a traffic map. In the U-Net, you can create traffic maps of four types, that is, grid maps based on traffic models, vector maps based on user behaviors, maps based on the transceiver coverage, and maps based on the user location.

Creating a Traffic Map

On the Data tab page, right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. You can select the required type in the Select Map Type dialog box.

Figure 2-1 Traffic map

Create The Map Based on Environment: indicates grid maps based on the environment.

Create The Map Based on Vector: indicates maps based on vectors.

Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage: indicates traffic maps based on the coverage scope of the transceiver.

Create The Map Based on User Location: indicates traffic maps based on user locations.

Select traffic maps of a type and click Create map to create a traffic map.

1. Based on EnvironmentsIn the Select Map Type dialog box, select Based on Environments and click Create map. The New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 73 of 474

Page 94: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-1 Based on Environments (1)

In the Polygon regions drop-down list, select a polygon that has been created, and click Add.

Figure 2-2 Based on Environments (2)

Select a type for Environments and click Apply and OK i sequence, as shown in Figure 2-2.

After you select a polygon, you can also perform other operations, such as Add Point and Delete Polygon.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 74 of 474

Page 95: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

After the cursor moves to a polygon, parameters in the tips dialog box include the name of the polygon, area of the polygon, and boundaries of the polygon. You can calculate the number of subscribers in the polygon based on the area of the polygon.

Subscribers = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface

Subscribers: indicates subscribers that use network resources, including subscribers that do not attempt to access the network.

In the Environments box, Density is defined as follows:

For CS services, #Users = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface x (Calls/h x Duration/3600)

For PS services, #Users = Density (#subscribers/km2) x polygon surface x (Calls/h x (ULVolume/UL Packet efficiency Factor/UL Nominal Rate of service (or Bearer) + DL Volume/DL Packet efficiency Factor/DL Nominal Rate of service (or Bearer)) x 8/3600)

Figure 2-3 Based on Environments (3)

Usually, when you have to create multiple traffic maps, the area of a single map is independent instead of accumulated. Although the areas may be overlapped, the traffic maps do not affect each other.

On the GEO tab page, right-click Polygons and choose Statistics. You can view the area and percentage of topographic forms of each type in the displayed Clutter Statistics window, as shown in Figure 2-4.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 75 of 474

Page 96: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-4 Based on Environments (4)

2. Based on Vector

On the Data tab page of the U-Net, choose Traffic Parameters > Traffic Map. Right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map > Create The Map Based on Vector.

In the Vector Traffic Map Properties window, set General, Vector, and Traffic.

Figure 2-1 Vector Traffic Map Properties (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 76 of 474

Page 97: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Name: indicates the name of a new vector traffic map.

Figure 2-2 Vector Traffic Map Properties (2)

Name: indicates the name of an element in the vector map.

Density: indicates the density. The default value is 0.

There are two buttons, Add and Delete, on the Vector tab page. The buttons are used to add and delete vectors.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 77 of 474

Page 98: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-3 Vector Traffic Map Properties (3)

User Profiles: indicates a user type. The default value is Business User.

Mobility: indicates a mobility type. The default value is 30km/h.

Density: indicates the traffic density. The default value is 0.

Add a vector: On the Vector tab page, select the name of the generated vector traffic map and draw a polygon in the specified area, for example, the faint red part, as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Adding a vector

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 78 of 474

Page 99: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Right-click the new vector traffic map and choose Properties > Vector > Add. Then, select a vector, as shown in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Selecting a vector

Delete a vector: On the Vector tab page, select a vector and click Delete to delete the vector.

3. Based on Transceiver CoverageOn the Data tab page, right-click Traffic Map and choose New Map. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Select Map Type

Select Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage and click Create Map. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 79 of 474

Page 100: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (General)

On the Transceiver tab page, set related parameters.

Figure 2-3 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Transceiver)

Prediction Group: selects a coverage prediction group. A prediction group can be available in the Prediction Group drop-down list only when the prediction groups contains the Best Server study.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 80 of 474

Page 101: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Users Per Service: sets the number of users corresponding to each service type in each cell.

Tx_ID: indicates the name of a cell and is determined by the selected coverage prediction group.

Service Type (TEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb Browsing) (UL): indicates the number of uplink subscribers of a service type.

Service Type (LTEFTP, LTEVideo Conferencing, LTEVoIP, LTEWeb Browsing) (DL): indicates the number of downlink subscribers of a service type.

Prediction Group: On the Operation tab page, right-click Predictions and choose Group, the prediction group is displayed. Before creating traffic maps of a certain type, ensure that a coverage prediction groups has been created.

Parameters on the Traffic tab page are as follows:

Figure 2-4 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties (Traffic)

Terminals: indicates the subscriber proportion of each terminal type. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.

Mobility: indicates the subscriber proportion of each terminal type. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.

Clutters: indicates different clutter types, that is, clutter types obtained from GIS the maps imported by users.

ID: indicates the numbers corresponding to different clutter types.

Weight: indicates the subscriber weight of each clutter and is used to calculate the number of subscribers to be allocated under each clutter. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.

Indoor: indicates the proportion of indoor subscribers under a clutter. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The unit is %.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 81 of 474

Page 102: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

After the preceding settings are complete, click OK to create a traffic map. To modify parameter settings of a created traffic map, you can double-click the traffic map or right-click the traffic map and choose Properties. Then, you can modify parameter settings on the displayed Transceiver Traffic Map Properties dialog box. Related information about parameter settings is not described in details for it has been provided before.

4. Based on User Location

Right-click Traffic map and choose New map. In the displayed Select Map Type dialog box, select Create The Map Based on User Location.

Figure 2-1 Select Map Type

On the User Location tab page, you can manually add the user location information and can also import the user location data. Click Import. Select a file and click Open. Set contents of the target column, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 User Location Traffic Map Properties

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 82 of 474

Page 103: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-3 Importing the user location (1)

The imported result is shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Importing the user location (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 83 of 474

Page 104: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

You can delete and modify the imported data. Parameters of subscriber data are described as follows:

X: indicates the X coordinate.

Y: indicates the Y coordinate.

Longitude: indicates the longitude.

Latitude: indicates the latitude.

Priority: indicates the priority. The value is an integer. The larger the value, the higher the priority.

Service: indicates a service type. The service type must have been defined in the traffic parameters.

Terminal: indicates a terminal type. The terminal type must have been defined in the traffic parameters.

Mobility: indicates a mobility type. The mobility type must have been defined in the traffic parameters.

LinkType: indicates the uplink/downlink type.

IsInDoor: indicates whether a subscriber is an indoor subscriber.

Traffic Map Condition

Creating traffic maps based on environments

Set the traffic of each region according to (such as urban, suburb, and dense urban). It is applicable to the average distribution scenario and is not frequently used.

Creating traffic maps based on vectors

Set the traffic of special geographical environment (such as railways, highways, and gathering place). It is applicable to the average distribution scenario and is not frequently used.

Creating traffic maps based on cell coverage

Set the service usage of each cell and corresponding traffic volume or throughput based on the cell coverage in the actual network. The coverage prediction result of each cell must be obtained to create the traffic map. Generally, a traffic map is created in this way.

Creating traffic maps based on user location

Network planning engineering can customize subscribers and service properties of subscribers according to the experience. This improves the accuracy of traffic data and therefore provides the accuracy of the simulation. This is used for comparison tests and simulation of wireless subscribers with comparatively fixed locations.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 84 of 474

Page 105: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Double-click a created traffic map based on the cell coverage. If such traffic map is unavailable, create a traffic map by referring to 2.3.9 In the displayed dialog box, On the Transceiver tab page of the Transceiver Traffic Map Properties window, select a group from the Prediction Group drop-down list, as shown in I. Step 1Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties

Enter the number of uplink/downlink subscribers for two or more service types (such as LETFTP and LTEVideo) corresponding to TX_ID, as shown in Figure 2-2. You can create multiple services such as voice services and data services in a traffic map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 85 of 474

Page 106: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net INTERNAL

Figure 2-2 Transceiver Traffic Map Properties

Click OK to complete the preparation of a mixed traffic map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 86 of 474

Page 107: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3 Planning and Simulation

3.1 PredictionUsing the U-Net, you can predict the network conditions from multiple dimensions.

3.1.1 Setting Prediction ParametersThe U-Net predicts the network performance, such as the cell coverage capability and channel quality, by calculating various indicators.

Set coverage parameters in parameter templates to be imported.

Site parameters are as follows:

Table 3-1 Site parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of a site. This parameter uniquely identifies a site.

Longitude Longitudinal coordinate.

Latitude Latitudinal coordinate.

Transceiver parameters are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 87 of 474

Page 108: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-2 Transceiver parameters

Parameter Description

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.

Site Name Name of the site to which a transceiver belongs.

Azimuth Azimuth of an antenna. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 360 (unit: degree).

Antenna Type of an antenna.

The default value of this parameter is determined based on the system antenna configuration. In most cases, the default value is the type of the first antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt of an antenna (unit: degree).

Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt of an antenna (unit: degree).

Height(m) Height of an antenna (unit: meter).

Input Total Loss If this parameter is selected, the total loss is entered manually.

If this parameter is deselected, the total loss is calculated by the system.

Total Loss(DL) Total downlink loss, including the loss from the TMA, feeder, and jumper and the miscellaneous loss.

Total Loss(UL) Total uplink loss, including the loss from the TMA, feeder, and jumper and the miscellaneous loss.

Number of Transmission

Antennas

Number of transmit antennas in a base station.

Number of Reception

AntennasNumber of receive antennas in a base station.

Number of Transmission

Antenna Ports

Number of transmit antenna ports.

LTE-FDD cell parameters are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 88 of 474

Page 109: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-3 LTE-FDD cell parameters

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

*Transceiver Name

Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

*MCC Mobile country code (MCC).

*MNC Mobile network code (MNC).

*CI ID of a cell.

*Frequency Band

Information about a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

*Main Propagation Model

Main propagation model.

*Main Radius(m)

Calculation radius of the main propagation model.

*Main Resolution(m)

Calculation precision of the main propagation model.

Max Power(dBm)

Maximum transmit power (unit: dBm).

Required for calculating all signal to interference plus noise ratios (SINRs)

*RS Power(dBm)

Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

PDSCH Actual Load(DL)

Actual load on the downlink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Required for calculating the downlink SINRs of service and

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 89 of 474

Page 110: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

reference signals

PDSCH Actual Load(UL)

Actual load on the uplink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Required for calculating the uplink SINRs of service and reference signals

Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol)

Number of OFDM symbols on the downlink PDCCH.

Required for calculating all downlink SINRs

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB)

Number of RBs on the uplink control channel. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of RBs on the entire bandwidth.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

Edge Frequency Style(UL)

Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the uplink. The Reuse3 status (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

Edge Frequency Style(DL)

Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the downlink.

When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported.

When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 state (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full-power Reuse1 state (AllPowerReuse1), and low-power Reuse1 state (LowPowerReuse1) are supported.

When this parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the value of CCU PA is used as the cell centers and the value of CEU PA is used as the cell edges for all users in the cell. When this parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the value of PA is used as the PA values for all

Required for calculating all downlink SINRs

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 90 of 474

Page 111: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

users in the cell. When this parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the value of CCU PA value is used as the PA values for all users in the cell.

ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) on the uplink.

When the ICIC function is disabled, the value of Actual IoT(UL) specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When the ICIC function is enabled, the value of CCU IoT is used at the cell center and the value of CEU IoT is used on the cell edge.

Depends on whether the ICIC function is enabled for the uplink

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink.

When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the value of PA specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, the ICIC function is enabled. In this case, the value of CCU PA is used at the cell center and the value of CEU PA is used on the cell edge.

When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC function can be automatically enabled and the edge band mode can be automatically configured. You can plan edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without configuring this parameter for cells one by one.

Depends on whether the ICIC function is enabled for the downlink

PBCH to RS(dB)

Offset of the public broadcast channel (PBCH) power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for PBCH-related indicators

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 91 of 474

Page 112: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the synchronization channel (SCH) power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for SCH-related indicators

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PCFICH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB). PCFICH is short for downlink physical control format indicator channel.

Required for PCFICH-related indicators

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PDCCH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB). PDCCH is short for downlink physical downlink control channel.

Required for PDCCH-related indicators

PHICH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PHICH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB). PHICH is short for physical HARQ indicator channel and HARQ is short for hybrid automatic repeat request.

Required for PHICH-related indicators

Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

Acutal Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

PA(dB) Offset of the PDSCH RE transmit power relative to the reference signal RE transmit power. PDSCH is short for physical downlink shared channel.

The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15. The default value is –3.

Required for PDSCH-related indicators

CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by cell center users (CCUs) relative to the reference signal power.

The value of this parameter ranges

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 92 of 474

Page 113: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

from –15 to 15. The default value is –6.

CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by cell edge users (CEUs) relative to the reference signal power.

The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15. The default value is –1.77.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

*PB(dB) Index for the offset of the power of category-A and category-B symbols for data REs relative to the reference signal RE power. The value of this parameter can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.

CCU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell center user (CCU).

The value of this parameter ranges from –100 to 100. The default value is 12.5.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

CEU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell edge user (CEU).

The value of this parameter ranges from –100 to 100. The default value is 10.5.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

Alpha Open-loop power control parameter indicating the coefficient for pass loss compensation in a cell.

Required for all indicators related to uplink reference and service signals

Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop power control.

Required for all indicators related to uplink service and reference signals and uplink control

PUCCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUCCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUCCH, the PUCCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces

Required for calculating the SINR of the PUCCH

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 93 of 474

Page 114: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

PRACH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PRACH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PRACH, the PRACH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for calculating the SINR of the PRACH

PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for calculating the SINR of the PUSCH

COMP Indicates whether to enable the coordinated multi-point transmission/reception technology (CoMP) function.

You can enable the CoMP function for the uplink in a base station, thereby improving the cell edge capacity and the average cell throughput. This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for calculating the SINR of the PUSCH

Channel Relativity

Indicates whether to consider the channel correlation.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for all throughput-related indicators

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 94 of 474

Page 115: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

Transmission Mode

Transmission mode.

For details about the value of this parameter, see Table 3-5.

Required for all throughput-related indicators

LTE-TDD cell parameters are as follows:

Table 3-4 LTE-TDD cell parameters

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

Transceiver *Name

Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

*MCC Mobile country code (MCC).

*MNC Mobile network code (MNC).

*CI ID of a cell.

*Frequency Band

Information about a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

*Main Propagation Model

Main propagation model.

*Main Radius(m)

Calculation radius of the main propagation model.

*Main Resolution(m)

Calculation precision of the main propagation model.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 95 of 474

Page 116: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

*Max Power(dBm)

Maximum transmit power (unit: dBm).

*RS Power(dBm)

Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

PDSCH Actual Load(DL)

Actual load on the downlink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Required for calculating the downlink SINRs of service and reference signals

PDSCH Actual Load(UL)

Actual load on the uplink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Required for calculating the uplink SINRs of service and reference signals

Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol)

Number of OFDM symbols on the downlink PDCCH.

Required for calculating all downlink SINRs

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB)

Number of RBs on the uplink control channel. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number of RBs on the entire bandwidth.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

Edge Frequency Style(UL)

Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the uplink. The Reuse3 status (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

Edge Frequency Style(DL)

Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the downlink. When ICIC(DL) is set to Static

ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported.

When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 state (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full-power Reuse1 state (AllPowerReuse1), and low-power Reuse1 state (LowPowerReuse1) are

Required for calculating all downlink SINRs

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 96 of 474

Page 117: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

supported. When this parameter is set to the

Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the value of CCU PA is used as the cell centers and the value of CEU PA is used as the cell edges for all users in the cell. When this parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the value of PA is used as the PA values for all users in the cell. When this parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the value of CCU PA value is used as the PA values for all users in the cell.

ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink. When the ICIC function is

disabled, the value of Actual IoT(UL) specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When the ICIC function is enabled, the value of CCU IoT is used at the cell center and the value of CEU IoT is used on the cell edge.

Depends on whether the ICIC function is enabled for the uplink

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink. When this parameter is set to

ICIC Off, the value of PA specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, the ICIC function is enabled. In this case, the value of CCU PA is used at the cell center and the value of CEU PA is used on the cell edge.

When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC function can be automatically enabled and the edge band mode can be automatically configured. You can plan edge band modes

Depends on whether the ICIC function is enabled for the downlink

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 97 of 474

Page 118: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

and then deliver the band modes without configuring this parameter for cells one by one.

PBCH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PBCH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for PBCH-related indicators

SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for SCH-related indicators

PCFICH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PCFICH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for PCFICH-related indicators

PDCCH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PDCCH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for PDCCH-related indicators

PHICH to RS(dB)

Offset of the PHICH power relative to the reference signal power. The value of this parameter ranges from –15 to 15 (unit: dB).

Required for PHICH-related indicators

Actual IoT(UL)(dB)

Acutal Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on the uplink.

Required for calculating all uplink SINRs

PA(dB) Offset of the PDSCH RE transmit power relative to the reference signal RE transmit power.

The value of this parameter ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.

Required for PDSCH-related indicators

CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by CCUs relative to the reference signal power.

The value of this parameter ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH Required when the

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 98 of 474

Page 119: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

category-A symbols received by CEUs relative to the reference signal power.

The value of this parameter ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.

ICIC function is enabled

*PB(dB) Index for the offset of the power of category-A and category-B symbols for data REs relative to the reference signal RE power. The value of this parameter can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.

CCU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell center user (CCU).

The value of this parameter ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 12.5.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

CEU IoT(dB) IoT of a cell edge user (CEU).

The value of this parameter ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is 10.5.

Required when the ICIC function is enabled

Alpha Open-loop power control parameter indicating the coefficient for pass loss compensation in a cell.

Required for all indicators related to uplink reference and service signals

Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop power control.

Required for all indicators related to uplink service and reference signals and uplink control

PUCCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUCCH, the PUCCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for calculating the SINR of the PUCCH

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 99 of 474

Page 120: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

PRACH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PRACH, the PRACH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for calculating the SINR of the PRACH

PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for all counters related to the SINR of the PUSCH

COMP Indicates whether to enable the coordinated multi-point transmission/reception technology (CoMP) function.

You can enable the CoMP function for the uplink in a base station, thereby improving the cell edge capacity and the average cell throughput.This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for all counters related to the SINR of the PUSCH

Channel Relativity

Indicates whether to consider the channel correlation.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Required for all throughput-related indicators

Transmission Mode

Transmission mode.

For details about the value of this parameter, see Table 3-5.

Required for all throughput-related indicators

*DwPTS-GP-UpPTS

Special subframe ratio.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 100 of 474

Page 121: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description Indicator

*Frame Configuration

Uplink and downlink subframe configuration. Including the ratios of uplink,

downlink, and special subframes.

Value example: DSUUUDSUUU.

D indicates a downlink subframe, S indicates a special subframe, and U indicates an uplink subframe.

Table 3-5 Values of the Transmission Mode parameter

Value Description

TM1 Single antenna port. This value is used for the eNodeB 1T configuration.

TM2 Open-loop transmit diversity (OL-TD). This value is used for the eNodeB 2T2R, 4T2R, 4T4R, or 8T8R configuration.

TM3 Open-loop spatial multiplexing (OL-SM). This value is used for the eNodeB 2T2R, 4T2R, or 4T4R configuration.

TM4 Closed-loop spatial multiplexing (CL-SM). This value is used for the eNodeB 2T2R, 4T2R, or 4T4R configuration.

TM6 Closed-loop transmit diversity (CL-TD). This value is used for the eNodeB 2T2R, 4T2R, or 4T4R configuration.

TM7 Single-stream beamforming.

This transmission mode is unavailable for LTE-FDD.

TM8 Single- and dual-stream beamforming.

This transmission mode is unavailable for LTE-FDD.

TM2/3 Open-loop adaptation (between TM2 and TM3).

TM4/6 Closed-loop adaptation (between TM4 and

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 101 of 474

Page 122: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Value Description

TM6).

TM2/3/4/6 Open- and closed-loop adaptation (between TM2, TM3, TM4, and TM6).

TM2/3/7 BF/MIMO adaptation. For UEs that support 3GPP Release 8 specifications but do not support uplink transmit antenna selection, the transmission mode can be switched between TM2, TM3, and TM7 for adaptation.

This transmission mode is unavailable for LTE-FDD.

TM2/3/8 BF/MIMO adaptation. For UEs that support 3GPP Release 9 specifications but do not support uplink transmit antenna selection, the transmission mode can be switched between TM2, TM3, and TM8 for adaptation.

This transmission mode is unavailable for LTE-FDD.

3.1.2 Setting Prediction Global ParametersOn the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click Predictions and choose Properties.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 102 of 474

Page 123: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Prediction properties (1)

The Predictions Properties window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Prediction properties (2)

Default resolution: predicts the default accuracy of the calculation. After Default resolution is set, the prediction accuracy of all prediction groups is the value of Default resolution. Generally, the prediction accuracy is the same as the accuracy of the map and that of the cell transmission accuracy. The setting of Default resolution has great impact on the prediction calculation. The value of Default resolution affects not only the reliability of the prediction result, but also the time of prediction calculation. The higher

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 103 of 474

Page 124: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

the accuracy, the longer the calculation time. You can modify the calculation accuracy as required.

The settings in the Receiver window are as follows:

Figure 3-3 Prediction properties (3)

Height: indicates the distance between the terminal and the ground during the simulation. The recommended height is 1.5 m.

3.1.3 Creating a Prediction GroupOn the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click Predictions and choose New.

If you select New Single Cell Prediction, a prediction groups of a single cell is created. By default, other cells are regarded as unactivated. You can select New Single Cell Prediction to effectively view the prediction results of each cell in batches, ensuring that there is no cell interference.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 104 of 474

Page 125: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Creating a prediction group (1)

The New Prediction Group window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Creating a prediction group (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 105 of 474

Page 126: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

The prediction studies include Coverage by Signal Level(DL), Coverage By C/(I+N) Level(DL), Coverage by Signal Level(UL), Coverage By C/(I+N) Level(UL), Coverage By MCS(DL), Coverage By Throughput(DL), Coverage By MCS(UL), and Coverage By Throughput(UL). When creating a new prediction group, you select the prediction studies as required. For LTE-FDD network systems, there are 40 prediction studies; for LTE-TDD network systems, there are 25 prediction studies.

By default, only common prediction studies are displayed. To display studies that are not frequently used, right-click the corresponding study node and choose More Coverage, as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Creating a prediction group (3)

To hide studies that are not frequently used, click Clear More.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 106 of 474

Page 127: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Creating a prediction group (4)

Group Name: indicates the name of a prediction group.

Calculate Now: indicates whether to calculate each prediction study immediately. If the parameter is selected, the prediction study is calculated immediately. If the parameter is not selected, the prediction group is only created.

Click Next. A window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-5.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 107 of 474

Page 128: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 Creating a prediction group (5)

Parameters on the General tab page are as follows:

Name: indicates the name of a new prediction group.

Resolution: indicates the calculation precision. The parameter value can be the same as the value of Default resolution or can be changed according to prediction requirements.

Intra-Frequency Handover(dB): indicates the handover threshold of intra-frequency cells. This parameter is effective when predicting the Handover Area and Overlapping Zones studies.

Inter-Frequency Handover(dB): indicates the handover threshold of inter-frequency cells. This parameter is effective when predicting the Handover Area and Overlapping Zones studies.

Polygon: indicates the area calculated in prediction. You can draw a polygon in the prediction area in the Map window.

Neighbour PDSCH Load: indicates the interference on the neighbor PDSCH.

Neighbour PDSCH Load: indicates the interference on the neighbor PDCCH.

With Shadow: indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation. If this parameter is selected, shadow fading is calculated

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 108 of 474

Page 129: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

based on the probability of cell edge coverage set by Cell Edge Coverage Probability. If this parameter is not selected, shadow fading is not considered.

The shadow fading margin is calculated based on the probability of cell edge coverage and the standard deviation of the shadow fading. The standard deviation of the shadow fading is set in the parameter worksheet by choosing Map > clutter > parameter management on the GEO tab page.

Indoor Coverage: indicates whether penetration loss is considered in the calculation. If this parameter is selected, penetration loss of each clutter type is considered in the calculation.

Parameters on the Condition tab page are shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Creating a prediction group (6)

Signal Level(DL)(dBm): indicates the receive threshold of the downlink reference signal. If the signal strength of a grid is beyond the set scope, prediction studies in this grid are not calculated during the prediction and appear blank in the prediction map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 109 of 474

Page 130: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Signal Level(UL)(dBm): indicates the receive threshold of the uplink reference signal. If the signal strength of a grid is beyond the set scope, prediction studies in this grid are not calculated during the prediction and appear blank in the prediction map.

Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm): indicates the interference threshold. If the interference of neighboring cells on the main service cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, it is considered that neighboring cells have no interference on the main service cell.

Terminal: indicates a terminal type. You can select a terminal type from the Terminal drop-down list. Also, you can set a terminal type by choosing Traffic Parameter > Terminal on the Data tab page.

Service: indicates a service type. You can select a service type from the Service drop-down list. Also, you can set a service type by choosing Traffic Parameter > Service on the Data tab page.

Mobility: indicates a mobility type. You can select a mobility type from the Mobility drop-down list. Also, you can set a mobility type by choosing Traffic Parameter > Mobility on the Data tab page.

Parameters on the Advanced tab page are as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Creating a prediction group (7)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 110 of 474

Page 131: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameters on the Advanced tab page are used to filter frequency bands. The filtered frequency bands do not participate in the calculation of Best Server studies but participate in the calculation of interference. For example, you select band 2110 and set Channel Index to 0. Therefore, the coverage prediction only calculates cells at band 2110 and with the Channel Index of 0. Other cells do not serve as source cells. Interference of these cells can be taken into consideration.

Frequency Name: indicates the name of a frequency band.

Channel Index: indicates the ARFCN for the prediction.

After these parameters are set, click OK. A new prediction group is created. You can view the new prediction group from the Predictions drop-down list on the Operation tab page.

Figure 3-8 Creating a prediction group (8)

3.1.4 Running the PredictionAfter a prediction group is created, you can formally run the calculation. The operating procedure for invoking the calculation is as follow:

Calculating a Single Prediction Group

Step 1 When creating a new prediction group, select Calculate Now. After the prediction group is created, the calculation is automatically started.

Step 2 Right-click a prediction group under Predictions and choose Calculate to start the calculation.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 111 of 474

Page 132: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Calculating a single prediction group

If only some studies in the current prediction group need to be calculated, you can lock the studies that need not to be calculated, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 112 of 474

Page 133: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Locking prediction studies

Also, you can unlock the locked studies.

Figure 3-3 Unlocking prediction studies

If all studies in the current prediction group are locked, calculation of the prediction group cannot be performed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 113 of 474

Page 134: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Failing to perform the calculation

----End

Calculating Multiple Prediction Groups

Right-click Predictions and choose Calculate. All prediction groups under Predictions are calculated by sequence.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 114 of 474

Page 135: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Calculating multiple prediction groups

If only some prediction groups need to be calculated, you can lock all studies in the prediction groups that need not to be calculated, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 115 of 474

Page 136: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Locking prediction studies

Also, you can unlock the locked prediction groups.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 116 of 474

Page 137: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Unlocking prediction studies

If all prediction groups are locked, calculation of the prediction groups cannot be performed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 117 of 474

Page 138: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Failing to perform the calculation

During the calculation, the current progress is displayed on the Task tab page in the Event Viewer window of the U-Net.

Figure 3-5 Calculation progress

The U-Net automatically starts the calculation of the path loss before the prediction calculation.

During the prediction calculation, you can right-click Predictions and choose Stop or right-click a prediction group and choose Stop to stop the calculation of the prediction group.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 118 of 474

Page 139: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-6 Stopping the prediction calculation (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 119 of 474

Page 140: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-7 Stopping the prediction calculation (2)

3.1.5 Viewing the Prediction ResultThe U-Net provides several modes for outputting each prediction study, such as prediction map, statistics map, statistics table, and data export of Bin point.

Outputting a Prediction Map

During the actual project planning, it is the most commonly-used and visible way to display the prediction results in a prediction map. The following figure is an example of a prediction map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 120 of 474

Page 141: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Example of a prediction map

Step 1 Set the legend. Right-click a prediction study such as DL RSRP, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Setting the legend (1)

Choose Properties. In the displayed Study Properties window, click Display. The Display tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 121 of 474

Page 142: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Setting the legend (2)

On the Display tab page, you can change the color and range of the legend on the prediction map. You can directly click each range to change its color and scope. Also, you can click Actions to perform operations such as Insert Before, Insert After, Delete, Export Legend, Import Legend, and Shading.

Transparency: indicates the transparency. The greater the parameter value, the higher the transparency. The setting of the transparency is used to display the superimposed comparison of prediction results of several studies.

Add to legend: If Add to legend is selected, the legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.

Show Statistic: If Show Statistic is selected, the statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.

By default, the Legend window is not displayed. You can choose Edit > Legend to display the Legend window.

Actions: The Actions drop-down menu is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 122 of 474

Page 143: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Setting the legend (3)

− Insert Before: indicates that a new range is inserted before the specified range.

− Insert After: indicates that a new range is inserted after the specified range.

− Delete: indicates that the specified range is deleted.

− Export Legend: indicates that the current range setting is exported. The current range setting can be applied to the legend range of the same study in other prediction groups.

− Import Legend: indicates that the existing range setting is imported.

− Shading: indicates the automatic range. You can set the start break and end break of the range.

Figure 3-4 Setting the legend (4)

Step 2 Export MIF/JPG figures in batches.

Right-click a prediction group and choose Export Results.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 123 of 474

Page 144: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 124 of 474

Page 145: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Exporting MIF/JPG figures in batches (2)

Select the studies to be exported, select MIF or JPG, and click Export. Then, the MIF/JPG figures of multiple studies can be exported in batches.

----End

Exporting a Statistics Figure

The statistics about an indicator can be displayed in a CDF or PDF figure, which is achieved by choosing Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu.

Statistics of a single study

Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RS SINR.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 125 of 474

Page 146: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Items in the shortcut menu for the statistics about a single an indicator

− If you choose Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, the CDF statistics figure shown in Figure 3-2 is displayed.

Figure 3-2 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a counter (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 126 of 474

Page 147: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)

− If you choose Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu, the PDF statistics figure shown in Figure 3-4 is displayed.

Figure 3-4 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 127 of 474

Page 148: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of an indicator (2)

Statistics of studies in a prediction group

Right-click a prediction group and choose Statistics(CDF) or Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 128 of 474

Page 149: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-6 Items in the shortcut menu for the indicator statistics about a prediction group

− If you choose Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, the CDF statistics figure for each indicator in the prediction group is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 129 of 474

Page 150: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-7 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1)

Figure 3-8 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 130 of 474

Page 151: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

− If you choose Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu, the PDF statistics figure for each indicator in the prediction group is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 131 of 474

Page 152: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-10 Viewing the PDF statistics figure of a prediction group (2)

Study: indicates the prediction studies. You can choose different studies to view the statistics figures.

Zone: You can set this parameter to the area of the prediction group or a hotspot.

Statistics Area: Statistics Area can be set to either Coverage Area or Calculate Area. Coverage Area indicates that the statistics is based on the coverage area and Calculate Area indicates that the statistics is based on the calculation area.

Figure Style: When you choose Statistics(CDF), you can set this parameter to CDF (to view a CDF figure) or Inverse CDF (to view a reversed CDF figure). When you choose Statistics(PDF), this parameter is unavailable.

When statistics on indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink throughput are collected, the statistics parameters are changed as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 132 of 474

Page 153: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-11 Selecting indicators related to the uplink throughput and downlink throughput

Figure 3-12 Viewing the CDF statistics figure of a selected uplink or downlink indicator

Show Average And Edge Value: indicates whether to display the average value and the edge throughput.

Edge Radio (%): sets the edge throughput.

Exporting a Statistics Table Statistics of a single study

Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RS SINR.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 133 of 474

Page 154: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting a statistics table (1)

Choose Generate Report. A statistics table is generated, as shown in Figure 3-2. Based on the set ranges, the U-Net exports the percentage, cumulative percentage of each range and the proportion of each clutter class.

Figure 3-2 Exporting a statistics table (2)

Statistics of a single prediction group

Right-click a prediction group under Predictions.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 134 of 474

Page 155: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Exporting a statistics table (3)

Choose Export Results. A window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-4.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 135 of 474

Page 156: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Exporting a statistics table (4)

For studies whose statistics data is to be exported, select Statistics. Also, you can select the statistics items and click Export to export the statistics data.

Statistics of multiple studies

Right-click Predictions.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 136 of 474

Page 157: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 Exporting a statistics table (5)

Choose Generate Report. A statistics table is generated, as shown in Figure 3-6. Based on the set ranges, the U-Net exports the accumulated percentage of each range and the proportion of each clutter class.

Figure 3-6 Exporting a statistics table (6)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 137 of 474

Page 158: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Exporting Bin Data

Right-click a prediction study, such as DL RSRP.

Figure 3-1 Exporting bin data

Choose Export BIN By. The simulation results of each bin are exported.

The simulation results can be exported in any of the three modes:

Polygon: indicates that the prediction results are exported by the selected area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 138 of 474

Page 159: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Exporting data by area

DL RSRP: indicates that the prediction results are exported by the selected RSRP range segment, as shown in Figure 3-3.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 139 of 474

Page 160: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Exporting data by DL RSRP

Top Signal Level: indicates that the top N levels that satisfy the threshold of Min Signal Level on each bin are exported. The exported data is used to generate the data of the feature database, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Exporting data by top signal level

3.1.6 Adjusting Parameters Based on Prediction Results

During the routine planning, the RSRP or SINR coverage effect may be poor. In this case, you can adjust some parameters to improve the coverage effect.

Adjusting RSRP Parameters

Step 1 Adjust the configurations of the propagation model and change the parameters and formula coefficient. If there is drive test data, you are advised to use the propagation model after the model is calibrated using the drive test data.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 140 of 474

Page 161: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Step 2 Decrease the standard derivation of shading fading of clutter parameters.

Step 3 Check whether the setting of the antenna height is correct. Generally, the antenna height is the relative height compared to the ground surface.

Step 4 Increase the power of pilot signals based on different scenarios.

----End

Adjusting SINR Parameters

Step 1 Decrease the value of Actual Load in cell parameters to decrease the load of interference cell.

Step 2 Decrease the derivation value of shading fading C/(I+N) to be 2 dB to 4 dB smaller than the standard derivation value.

----End

3.1.7 Comparing Prediction Results in Different Scenarios

After adjusting parameters, you can copy the existing prediction groups, calculate the same studies, and compare results before and after parameters are adjusted to check the quality of the parameter adjustment.

Copying the Prediction Group

Right-click an existing prediction group and choose Duplicate.

Figure 3-1 Copying the prediction group

Running the Prediction Group

For detailed operations, see section 3.1.4.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 141 of 474

Page 162: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Comparing Prediction Results

Step 1 Compare CDF figures.

Select the prediction groups and corresponding studies to be compared. Right-click Predictions and choose Compare.

Figure 3-1 Comparing prediction results (1)

Figure 3-2 Comparing prediction results (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 142 of 474

Page 163: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

You can view the comparison results of multiple prediction groups by choosing different studies from the drop-down list.

You can choose Coverage Area or Calculate Area for comparison. Coverage Area indicates the coverage area of the cell and Calculate Area indicates the polygon calculation area selected from the prediction group. If the prediction group predicts the full map, Coverage Area equals to Calculate Area.

Step 2 Compare statistics reports.

Select the prediction groups and corresponding studies to be compared. Right-click Predictions and choose Generate Report.

Figure 3-1 Comparing prediction results (3)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 143 of 474

Page 164: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Comparing prediction results (4)

----End

3.1.8 Exporting Prediction ResultsFor details, see 3.1.5.

3.1.9 Printing Prediction ResultsThe U-Net provides two methods of printing rendering figures of prediction results.

3.1.10 Method 1Print prediction results of a single study or multiple studies in a prediction group in batches. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click a prediction group and choose Batch Print, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 144 of 474

Page 165: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Printing PDF figures in batches (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 145 of 474

Page 166: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Printing PDF figures in batches (2)

Step 2 Select the area to be printed (entire network or major areas marked by the polygon), select required studies, and click Print to print rendering figures of all selected studies. For details about printing settings, see section 4.4 "Print."

The rendering figures of studies can be printed only for studies that are selected.

----End

Method 2

Print prediction results of a single study. The operation procedure is as follows:

Select nodes of study trees to be printed (that is, deselect other studies), and then print the print results by referring to the operation procedures described in section 4.4 "Print."

3.1.11 Modifying a Prediction GroupFor an existing prediction group, you can modify the properties of a prediction group or add/delete studies for calculation as required before performing the prediction calculation.

Modifying the Properties of a Prediction Group

Right-click a prediction group to be modified and choose Properties. Then, modify the properties of the prediction group on the displayed Group Properties window.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 146 of 474

Page 167: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 147 of 474

Page 168: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Modifying the properties of a prediction group (2)

For a prediction group that has been successfully calculated, the lock status of studies in the prediction group will be changed to unlocked after the properties are modified.

Adding/Deleting Prediction Studies

Right-click a prediction group to be changed and choose Edit Studies, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 148 of 474

Page 169: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Adding/deleting prediction studies (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 149 of 474

Page 170: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Adding/deleting prediction studies (2)

Select or deselect studies in the Edit Studies window as required and click OK to make the modifications effective.

3.1.12 Deleting a Prediction Group

Deleting the Specified Prediction Group

Right-click a prediction group to be deleted and choose Delete to delete the prediction group.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 150 of 474

Page 171: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Deleting the selected prediction group

Deleting All Single-Cell Prediction Groups

Right-click Predictions and choose Delete Single Cell Prediction. All single-cell prediction groups will be deleted.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 151 of 474

Page 172: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Deleting all single cell prediction groups

3.2 Neighboring Cell PlanningThe neighboring UMTS cell planning can be performed in three modes, topology, prediction, and prediction + topology. In the scenario of creating a network where maps are available, the prediction + topology mode is recommended for the neighboring cell planning.

3.2.1 Planning DataBefore neighboring cell planning, you need to import engineering parameters, which are used as entities for neighboring cell planning. If neighboring cell planning is performed in prediction or prediction + topology mode, you need to import the e-map corresponding to the engineering parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 152 of 474

Page 173: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Data Usage Requirement

E-map An e-map is the basis for coverage neighboring cell planning.

The U-Net supports the import of e-maps in Plannet, *.TAB, and *.mif formats.

The layers to be imported are as follows: Clutter map (mandatory) Altitude map (mandatory) Vector map (optional) Building height map

(mandatory if the Vocanno propagation model is used)

Engineering parameters

Engineering parameters include information, such as the locations, types, frequencies, frequency bands, and cell parameters of all candidate sites, and therefore are the basic data for neighboring cell planning.

The U-Net supports the import of engineering parameters in TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX formats.

The engineering parameters contain the following information: Site information: such as the

site name and location (latitude and longitude)

Antenna information: such as the antenna azimuth

Cell information: such as the frequency band and propagation model

For details about the scenarios and how to plan data, see GSM Technology Guide provided by the Solutuons Design Department.

Set coverage parameters in parameter templates to be imported.

For details about the settings of site parameters, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

For details about the settings of transceiver parameters, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

The settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 153 of 474

Page 174: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

*Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

*Status Status of a cell compared with an existing neighboring cell. For details, see 3.2.5 I. Step 2Figure 3-3.

*Scene Scenario of a cell.

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

The settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as those of LTE-FDD cell parameters.

3.2.2 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning of a New Network

Setting Planning Parameters

On the Operation tab page on the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE and choose Neighbor Automatic Allocation to start the neighboring cell planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 154 of 474

Page 175: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Starting the neighboring cell planning

After the neighboring cell planning is started, the LTE Neighbor Plan Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 155 of 474

Page 176: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameters on the General tab page are as follows:

Methods Select area

− Topology: The topology mode is selected for neighboring cell planning. The distance and angle are considered and the network planning is quick. The downtilt of the antenna and geographical environment are not considered. In this case, the neighboring cell planning is performed in an ideal environment without considering any other factors.

− Prediction: The coverage prediction mode is selected for neighboring cell planning. According to the coverage prediction algorithm, the propagation model and engineering parameters are fully considered and the number of neighboring cells of border cells is controllable. The number of border cells is sensitive to changes of parameters. As a result, the parameters must be adjusted to obtain a better planning result. The planning speed is slower than that of the topology mode.

The coverage prediction is not required here.

− Topology + Prediction: The topology + prediction mode is selected for neighboring cell planning. When the number of neighboring cells planned in prediction mode does not exceed the threshold, neighboring cells planned in topology mode can be added to avoid that some neighboring cells are not configured and obtain a better planning result of central cells. The planning speed is slower than that of the topology mode and that of the prediction mode.

General Parameter area

− Max Neighbor Distance(km): indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.

− Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor: If this parameter is selected, the existing neighboring relationships are not deleted. This parameter is used to separate network creation from capacity expansion scenarios.

− Force Co-Site As Neighbor: If this parameter is selected, co-site cells are forcibly configured as neighboring cells.

− Co-Site Distance(m): indicates the distance tolerance allowed by co-site cells. This parameter is set due to possible errors of engineering parameters on the live network.

− Force Using Co-Site Existing Neighbor: indicates whether to use the existing 2G/3G neighboring relationships as reference for planning the neighboring cell relationships on LTE networks.

− Azimuth Difference(°): indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be planned and the cells used for reference.

Common Prediction Parameter area: When the neighboring cell planning mode is prediction or prediction + topology, prediction parameters can be set in this area.

− Handover Area Percent(%): indicates the handover area proportion. The source cell and target cell can be planned as neighboring cells only when the handover area of the source cell and the target cell is greater than or equal to the entered parameter value.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 156 of 474

Page 177: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

− Compute shadowing: indicates whether shadow fading margin is considered in the calculation.

− Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%): indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage.

− Compute Indoor Loss: If this parameter is selected, the penetration loss is considered in the calculation.

Intra-Technology Prediction Parameter area: When the neighboring cell planning mode is prediction or prediction + topology, parameters related to the calculation of intra-RAT handover areas are set in this area.

− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal signal receive level.

− Handover Threshold(dB): indicates the handover area threshold. The handover threshold refers to the threshold at which the UE handover may occur. The value of this parameter is usually set based on experience and the default value is 6.

Area: indicates the planning area. You can draw multiple planning areas on the interface to perform the simulation planning. You can select any required areas for neighboring cell planning. By default, the full map is planned. You can filter all cells where neighboring cells are not required in the selected planning area, as shown in Figure 3-3. If the Selected property of a cell is not selected, the neighboring cell planning is not required in the cell.

Figure 3-3 Filtering cells

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 157 of 474

Page 178: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Intra-Frequency tab page: Parameters for intra-frequency neighboring cell planning are set on the Intra-Frequency tab page.

Figure 3-4 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (2)

Max Neighbor Number of Indoor Cell: indicates the maximum number of indoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Max Neighbor Number of Outdoor Cell: indicates the maximum number of outdoor intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Force Symmetry: indicates whether to forcibly configure cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency tab page: Parameters related to inter-frequency neighboring cell planning can be set on the Inter-Frequency tab page.

Figure 3-5 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (3)

Max Neighbor Number of Indoor Cell: indicates the maximum number of indoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Max Neighbor Number of Outdoor Cell: indicates the maximum number of outdoor inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Force Symmetry: indicates whether to forcibly configure cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT tab page: The Inter-RAT tab page is available when other network systems (such as UMTS and GSM) are available. You can set parameters related to the inter-RAT neighboring cell planning on the Inter-RAT tab page.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 158 of 474

Page 179: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-6 Setting neighboring cell planning parameters (4)

Blind Handover Parameter area

Co-Site Distance: indicates the co-site distance. The default distance is 30 m. If the distance between two inter-RAT base stations is less than or equal to the value of this parameter, the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-site cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-site cells only if the distances between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base station are less than or equal to the value of this parameter.

Topology Parameter area: This option is required when planning inter-RAT neighboring cells in topology mode.

− Co-Transceiver Azimuth Difference: indicates the co-transceiver azimuth difference. The default azimuth difference is 5o. If the difference between the antenna azimuths of two cells is less than or equal to the co-transceiver azimuth difference, the two cells are considered as co-transceiver cells. If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTS networks are equipped with multiple antennas (or repeaters), the cells under the two base stations are considered as co-transceiver cells only if the azimuth difference between all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base station is less than or equal to the value of this parameter.

− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal receive signal level. The default minimal receive signal level is -110 (dBm).

Prediction Parameter area: This option is required when planning inter-RAT neighboring cells in prediction mode.

Best Handover Area Percent: indicates the best handover area proportion. The default value is 90(%). In multi-mode networks, the Best Server area of an LTE-FDD cell may overlap with the Best Server area

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 159 of 474

Page 180: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

of a GSM or UMTS cell. The proportion of this overlap area to the Best Server area of an LTE-FDD cell is called the handover area proportion. This proportion must be greater than or equal to the value of Best Handover Area Percent.

Inter-RAT Config area: This option is used to set handover rules of inter-RAT neighboring cells.

− SourceNetType: indicates the network system of source cell to be planned.

− To: indicates the network system of the target cells after the handover. The parameter value can be either UMTS or GSM.

− Min Signal Level(dBm): indicates the minimal receive signal level of an inter-RAT neighboring cell when the inter-RAT neighboring cell is planned in prediction mode or in prediction + topology mode.

− Handover Threshold(dB): indicates the inter-RAT handover threshold when the inter-RAT neighboring cell is planned in prediction mode or in prediction + topology mode. The handover threshold refers to the threshold at which the UE handover may occur. The value is set based on the experience, and the default value is 6.

− Max Number: indicates the maximum number of inter-RAT neighboring cells in the planned cell.

Running the Neighboring Cell Auto-Planning

After preceding parameters are set, click RUN to run the neighboring cell auto-planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Running the neighboring cell auto-planning

During the running progress, you can right-click LTE and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation to stop the neighboring cell auto-planning.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 160 of 474

Page 181: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Stopping neighboring cell auto-planning

Viewing Planning Results

After the planning is complete, you can view the planning results in tables or in geographical display mode.

Step 1 Viewing planning results in tables

After the neighboring cell auto-planning is complete, a window is automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. You can also right-click LTE and choose Open Neighbor Relations on the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane to display the neighboring cell worksheet.

The Cell box on the displayed window indicates the list of all cells in the system. By default, all the planned cells are displayed if the worksheet is automatically displayed after the neighboring cell planning is complete. Otherwise, all cells on the entire network are displayed. After you click a cell from the Cell box, neighboring cells of the selected cell are displayed on the worksheet on the right.

Figure 3-1 Viewing neighboring cell planning results in tables

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 161 of 474

Page 182: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Sequence: indicates the priority of neighboring cells.

Neighbor name: indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Blind Handover: indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover. This parameter is applicable only to inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Cause: indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. The value of this parameter can be co-site (indicating that the cell is under the same base station as the serving cell), topology (indicating that the neighboring cell is selected on the basis of network topology), coverage (indicating that the neighboring cell is selected on the basis of prediction results), symmetry (indicating that the cell is forcibly configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional neighboring relationships), force (indicating the neighboring relationships manually added by users), and existed (indicating the existing neighboring relationships on the network).

Confirm: If this parameter is selected, a cell is confirmed as the neighboring cell of the serving cell. When neighboring cell relationships are submitted to NEs, the cell is submitted as a neighboring cell. When the cell is exported, the status of the cell is not Deleted.

Colors of records in the worksheet have different meanings:

Black fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationships available both in the planning results and in existing neighboring cells.

Red fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationships available only in the planning result.

Gray fonts: indicates the neighboring cell relationship only in the existing neighboring cells. If the planning results are submitted to NEs, the planning results also become gray.

Blue: indicates the neighboring cell relationships that are forcibly added by a user.

Step 2 Viewing planning results in geographical display mode

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 162 of 474

Page 183: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Right-click LTE and choose Display Option on the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane to display the geographical display mode of neighboring cells.

Figure 3-1 Geographically displaying neighboring cells

After you choose Display Option, the following dialog box is displayed:

Figure 3-2 Setting the geographical display mode of neighboring cells

Display Links: If this parameter is selected, neighboring relationships are displayed by lines. An arrow indicates a unidirectional neighboring cell relationship and no arrow indicates a directional neighboring cell relationship.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 163 of 474

Page 184: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Color-Link: indicates setting different colors of the lines corresponding to different neighboring cell relationships. After you click Color Link, the LTE Neighbor Relation Links Color dialog box is displayed. You can change the colors of the lines corresponding to different neighboring cell relationships.

Figure 3-3 Setting the colors of connection lines for the geographical display mode of neighboring cells

Display Cell Color: If this parameter is selected, neighboring cell relationships are displayed in cell colors.

Color-Cell: Different cell colors can be set to correspond to different neighboring cell relationships. After you click OK, the LTE Neighbor Relation Cells Color dialog box is displayed. You can change the cell colors corresponding to different neighboring cell relationships:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 164 of 474

Page 185: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Setting cell colors for the geographical display of neighboring cells

Selected Cell Color: sets the display color of the source cell.

Fit Neighbor Cells Visible: displays the neighboring cell relationships of a cell on the center of the map and zoom out the map to a proper proportion after you select the cell in the neighboring cell relationship table.

Select Neighbor type: selects the neighboring cell types for the geographical display.

Intra Frequency Neighbors: If this parameter is selected, intra-frequency neighboring cell relationships are displayed.

Inter Frequency Neighbors: If this parameter is selected, inter-frequency neighboring cell relationships are displayed.

Inter-RAT Neighbors: If this parameter is selected, inter-RAT neighboring cell relationships are displayed.

After the preceding settings are complete, enable the geographical display function, that is, select LTE on the Project Explorer pane. (If LTE is not selected on the Project Explorer pane, the geographical display function is disabled.) Then, select the cells whose neighboring cell relationships are to be viewed on the GIS map or in the table. The geographical display result is shown in Figure 3-5.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 165 of 474

Page 186: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 Geographical display of neighboring cells

----End

Manually Adjusting Planning Results

After the neighboring cell auto-planning is complete, the U-Net provides two modes for adjusting neighboring cell relationships of some cells when necessary.

In the neighboring cell relationship table, deselect the Confirm column of unnecessary neighboring cells and select the Confirm column of necessary neighboring cells.

Adjust neighboring cells on the GIS map. The function of geographical display of neighboring cells needs to be enabled before parameters are adjusted.

Geographical unidirectional operation (addition/deletion): Select a source cell, press Ctrl + left mouse button to add the selected target cell to the list of neighboring cells of the source cell. If the target cell has been available in the list of neighboring cells of the source cell, the target cell is deleted from the list of neighboring cells of the target cell.

Geographical bidirectional operation (addition/deletion): Select a source cell, press Shift + left mouse button to add bidirectional neighboring cell relationships. If the neighboring cells have been configured as bidirectional neighboring cell relationships, the bidirectional neighboring cell relationships are deleted.

Submitting Planning Results

Right-click a planning result in the Cell box, the following window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Click Commit All to submit all neighboring cell planning results in the Confirm column to NEs.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 166 of 474

Page 187: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Submitting neighboring cell planning results

Exporting Planning Results

Right-click a planning result in the Cell box. The following window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Exporting neighboring cell relationships

Click Export. The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2. You can choose Incremental Export (exporting only added or deleted neighboring cell relationships) or Full Export and click Export to export intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT neighboring cell relationships at the same time.

The incremental export needs to be performed before planning results are submitted.

Figure 3-2 Selecting the mode for exporting neighboring cell relationships

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 167 of 474

Page 188: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

The procedure for exporting .xls files is as follows: The comparison status between planning results and existing neighboring cells are displayed in the Status column:

Added: Added neighboring cell relationship.

No Change: Existing neighboring cell relationship.

Deleted: Deleted neighboring cell relationship

Figure 3-3 Export files of neighboring cell relationships

Generating Neighboring Cell Scripts

Prepare neighboring cell planning scripts according to the generated neighboring cell planning results.

3.2.3 Neighboring Cell Replanning When Partial Network Is Expanded

Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships of the Original Network

The neighboring cell relationships of the original network can be obtained from MML scripts and then be imported based on the import templates supported by the U-Net.

On the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE and choose Import Neighbor Relations to display the Import Neighbor Relations dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 168 of 474

Page 189: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Importing neighboring cell relationships (1)

The Import Neighbor Relations dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Importing neighboring cell relationships (2)

Update Blind Handover Flag: If this parameter is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when the neighboring relationships are imported.

Click Browse to import the template (with the name of ExportExcel.xls) based on neighboring cell relationships and import neighboring cell relationships:

You can import neighboring cell relationships whose statuses are Added and No Change.

CellName and NeighborCellName need to match cells in NEs and must be unique.

Setting Planning Parameters

See section 3.2.2

Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor must be selected in the planning parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 169 of 474

Page 190: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Running the Neighboring Cell Auto-Planning

See section 3.2.2

Before running the neighboring cell auto-planning, ensure that the base station information, transceiver information, and cell information about the base station to be expanded have been imported to the U-Net.

Viewing Planning Results

See section 3.2.2

Manually Adjusting Planning Results

See section

Do not submit planning results after the planning results are manually adjusted.

Exporting Planning Results

See section 3.2.2

After the incremental import, statuses of neighboring cell relationships are Added or Deleted.

Generating Neighboring Cell Scripts

3.2.4 Planning Neighboring Cells of 4G Networks Using Neighboring Cells of 2G/3G Networks

Usually, 4G networks are deployed in areas where original 2G/3G networks are deployed. Therefore, neighboring cells of 2G/3G networks can be referred to when planning neighboring cells of 4G networks. This section describes the method for planning 4 G neighboring cells on the entire network in areas where 2G/3G networks are deployed.

When importing the cell information before the planning, you need to import the cell information of 2G/3G networks and the cell information of 4G networks respectively.

Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships of 2G/3G Networks

See section 3.2.3

When importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks, you need to choose GSM/UMTS under Neighbor Planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 170 of 474

Page 191: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Importing neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks

Setting Planning Parameters

See section 3.2.2

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 171 of 474

Page 192: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

When the neighboring cell planning function is enabled, right-click LTE. In the displayed window, choose Neighbor Automatic Allocation.

When setting parameters, Force Using Co-site 2G/3G Neighbor for Reference must be selected.

Figure 3-1 Referring to neighboring cell relationships of 2G/3G networks

Running the Neighboring Cell Auto-Planning

See section 3.2.2

Viewing Planning Results

See section 3.2.2

Manually Adjusting Planning Results

See section

Submitting Planning Results

See section 3.2.2

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 172 of 474

Page 193: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Exporting Planning Results

See section 3.2.2

Generating Neighboring Cell Scripts

See section 3.2.2

3.2.5 Checking Configurations of Neighboring Cells

Importing Neighboring Cell Relationships

See section 3.2.3

Filtering and Auditing Configurations of Neighboring Cells

Step 1 Filtering Neighboring Cell Relationships

Right-click any place in the Cell column of the planning result table and choose Filter.

Figure 3-1 Filtering neighboring cell relationships

The following window is displayed:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 173 of 474

Page 194: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Criteria for filtering neighboring cell relationships

Source area: sets filtering objects.

− Source Cell: selects the scope of cells to be filtered. All indicates cells on the entire network and Planning indicates cells within the planning scope (that is, Polygon).

− Intra-Frequency: filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.

− Inter-Frequency: filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.

− Inter-RAT: filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Condition area: sets filter criterion of cells to be filtered.

− None: sets on filter criterion.

− Empty List: filters the cells whose neighboring cells are not configured.

− Missing Co-Site: filters the cells that do not configure co-site cells as neighboring cells.

− Missing Symmetry: filters the bidirectional neighboring cells that are not configured.

− List >No: filters the neighboring cells whose neighboring cells are more than the specified value.

− Same PCI: filters the neighboring cells with the same PCI.

You can choose only one from the preceding filter criteria.

After the filter criterion is set, click OK. The cells that meet the filter criterion are displayed.

Step 2 Auditing Neighboring Cell Relationships

Right-click an item in Cell column of the planning result table and choose Audit.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 174 of 474

Page 195: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Auditing neighboring cell relationships

The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-2 Criteria for auditing neighboring cell relationships

Percentage of Reference Neighbors: indicates the percentage of cells whose neighboring cells are generated by referring to the existing neighboring cell relationships of cells.

Except for Percentage of Reference Neighbors, other parameters are the same as those for filtering neighboring cell relationships. You can select neighboring cells that meet multiple criteria. After the audit criterion is set, click OK. The cells meeting the audit criterion are displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 175 of 474

Page 196: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Result files of auditing neighboring cell relationships

----End

Checking Miss-Configured Neighboring Cell Relationships

The principle for checking miss-configured neighboring cell relationships is as follows: Perform the planning based on the current neighboring cell planning algorithm of the U-Net. Compare neighboring cells in the planning result with those on the live network to find miss-configured neighboring cells.

1. Neighboring Cell Planning

Perform the neighboring cell planning again based on the distribution of base stations on the live network by referring to section 3.1.1 "Setting Prediction Parameters."

You need to select Planning Neighbor based on existed Neighbor when performing the neighboring cell planning.

2. Checking Miss-Configured Neighboring Cell Relationships

You can import the neighboring cell planning result based on the distribution of base stations on the live network by increment. Neighboring cell relationships whose statuses are Added do not exist in the neighboring cell relationships configured on the live network. These neighboring cell relationships are regarded as miss-configured neighboring cell relationships.

3.3 PCI PlanningFor the planning of the LTE PCI, you can calculate the interference in prediction mode or topology mode and perform the PCI planning based on the interference. The PCI planning supports the scenarios of network creation, capacity expansion in a large scope, and segmental capacity expansion. The protocol specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used. Under the reduced bandwidth, the number of PCIs that can be planned is smaller based on different bandwidths.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 176 of 474

Page 197: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.3.1 Setting PCI Planning ParametersTo set PCI planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.

Table 3-1 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for PCI planning

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a cell.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current cell.

*Frequency Band Name of a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

PCI ID of a physical cell. (The PCI of an existing cell is mandatory in the expansion scenario.)

PCI Reuse Distance(Km) PCI reuse distance.

PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PCI reuse tiers.

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

Step 4 Set LTE-TDD cell parameters.

The settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as those of LTE-FDD cell parameters.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 177 of 474

Page 198: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.3.2 PCI Planning of a New/Expanded Network

Setting of PCI Planning

On the Operation tab page on the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE PCI Planning and choose Automatic Allocation…, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Window for setting the LTE PCI planning

The window for PCI planning is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 178 of 474

Page 199: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 LTE PCI planning (1)

Parameters on the General tab page are as follows:

Reserve Ratio: indicates the PCI reservation proportion. A certain proportion of PCIs is reserved among the available PCIs for indoor coverage or high-sites.

Start End: indicates the scope of PCIs that can be used for the planning. The protocol specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used.

Area: indicates the PCI planning area.

Filter: filters cells in the Area box to filter cells that do not need to be planned.

Load: imports the cluster information before planning the PCI and the PCI usage. When the planning is performed again, you can perform the segmental capacity expansion based on the imported information. For details about the cluster information about the segmental capacity expansion, see section I. Step 12.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 179 of 474

Page 200: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 LTE PCI planning (2)

Parameters on the Control Parameter tab page are as follows:

Max Interference Distance(km): indicates the maximum inter-cell interference distance. Inter-cell interference exceeds the distance is not calculated.

With Neighbor: indicates that two neighboring cells cannot use the same PCI. If the PCIs of two neighboring cells are the same, the neighboring cell planning must be performed or the neighboring cell relationships must be manually modified.

RS-Timing Shift: indicates whether to support the transmitting of RS signals of cells under a site at different time. This parameter is used to support functions of products developed by Huawei. Currently, Huawei does not provide such products. Therefore, this parameter is optional.

With Exist PCI: indicates whether to take into account the impact of the sites whose PCIs are planned on the sites whose PCIs are to be planned. This parameter is selected in the scenario of capacity expansion in a large scope (hybrid capacity expansion). For the capacity expansion scenario, you need to set cells with PCIs in the project.

With Compressed Frequency Bandwidth: indicates whether to support the PCI planning in the compressed bandwidth networking. The protocol specifies that PCIs ranging from 0 to 503 can be used. The number of available PCIs becomes smaller. The number of available PCIs varies with the bandwidth.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 180 of 474

Page 201: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 LTE PCI planning (3)

Parameters on the Advanced Parameter tab page are as follows:

Topology: Select Topology to plan PCIs based on the network topology.

Prediction: Select Prediction to plan PCIs based on the prediction results.

Min Signal Level (dbm): indicates the threshold of minimal receive signal level.

Handover area threshold (dB): indicates the handover area threshold.

Shadowing taken into account: selects Shadowing taken into account to take into account the shadow fading during the calculation of path loss.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability (%): sets the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%).

Indoor Coverage: selects Indoor Coverage to take into account indoor coverage during the calculation of path loss.

Running the PCI Auto-Planning

After preceding parameters are set, click RUN to run the PCI auto-planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 181 of 474

Page 202: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 LTE PCI auto-planning

If PCIs used for the planning are insufficient or the number of preserved PCIs is excessively large, the window shown in Figure 3-2 is displayed.

Figure 3-2 Example when PCIs are insufficient

Figure 3-3 Displayed message when PCIs are insufficient

During the PCI auto-planning, you can choose STOP PCI Codes Planning to stop the PCI auto-planning.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 182 of 474

Page 203: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Stopping the LTE PCI auto-planning

Viewing Planning Results

After the planning is complete, you can view the planning results in tables or in geographical display mode.

1. Viewing planning results in tables

After the PCI auto-planning is complete, the following window is automatically displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. You can also right-click LTE PCI Planning on the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane and choose Open PCI Code… to display the PCI table.

Figure 3-1 Viewing LTE PCI planning results

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 183 of 474

Page 204: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Table of LTE PCI results

Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.

PCI Block: indicates the ID of a cell cluster.

Existing Code: indicates the existing PCI value of a cell.

Suggest Code: indicates the planned PCI value of a cell.

Confirm Code: indicates the confirmed PCI value. You can modify the parameter value in the table.

2. Viewing planning results in geographical display mode

The PCIs can be displayed in geographical mode, that is, PCIs in the Confirm Code column are displayed.

On the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click Transceiver and choose Display Setting to set the display mode.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 184 of 474

Page 205: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Viewing LTE PCIs in geographical display mode

In the displayed window, you can add PCIs to the display area.

Figure 3-2 Setting the geographical display of PCIs

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 185 of 474

Page 206: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

After the preceding settings are complete, PCIs of each cell are displayed on the GIS map.

Figure 3-3 Geographical display of LTE PCIs

PCIs are displayed in geographical display mode. Select cells that have the same PCI, PCI Mod3, or PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE PCI Planning and choose Display Option.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 186 of 474

Page 207: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Geographical display of LTE PCIs

The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-5 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display S mode

Display Links: specifies whether to display lines between cells that have the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

Color-Link: sets the color of the line between the selected cell and cells that have the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 187 of 474

Page 208: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Display Cell Color: indicates whether to display the cells that have the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

Color-Cell: sets the color of the cells that have the same PCI/PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

Select Cell Color: sets the color of the selected cell.

Same PCI: displays cells that have the same PCI with the selected cell.

Same PCI Mod3: displays cells that have the same PCI Mod3 with the selected cell. The number of transceiver ports must be equal to or greater than 2.

Same PCI Mod6: displays cells that have the same PCI Mod6 with the selected cell. The number of transceiver ports is 1.

Figure 3-6 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-link)

Set the connection line mode of the cells that have the same PCI/ PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

Display Type: indicates the type of display data, interval or discrete.

Field Type: indicates the display data.

Color: indicates the color of display data.

Value: indicates the value of display data.

Legend: indicates the name of display data in the legend.

Add To Legend: indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter class to the legend.

Transparency: indicates the transparency of display color.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 188 of 474

Page 209: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-7 Displaying colors of LTE PCIs in geographical display mode (color-cell)

Set the mode of the cells that have the same PCI/ PCI Mod3/PCI Mod6 with the selected cell.

Display Type: indicates the display type of layer data, such as continuous or discontinuous.

Field Type: indicates the display data.

Color: indicates the color of display data.

Value: indicates the value of display data.

Legend: indicates the legend description of display data.

Add To Legend: indicates whether to add the coloring scheme of the clutter class to the legend.

Transparency: indicates the transparency of display color.

After the preceding parameters are set, enable the geographical display switch, that is, select LTE PCI Planning (if LTE PCI Planning is deselected, the switch is disabled). Select the cells whose PCIs are to be displayed on the map. The displayed result is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 189 of 474

Page 210: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-8 Geographical display of LTE PCIs

Manually Adjusting PCIs1. Adjust PCI planning results.

After the PCI planning is complete, network planning engineers can modify PCIs of cells according to the actual situation. The U-Net provides a quick and convenient way to modify PCIs of cells, that is, change the Confirm Code column of cells in the displayed PCI display table.

2. Adjust existing PCIs.

Double-click a transceiver on the GIS map to display the Transceiver Properties window. Switch to the LTE-FDDCell tab page to modify the existing PCIs.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 190 of 474

Page 211: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Adjusting existing PCIs

Submitting Planning Results

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display window. Click Commit to submit all confirm codes to NEs.

Figure 3-1 Submitting LTE PCI planning results

Exporting Planning Results1. The U-Net supports the exporting of common planning results.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 191 of 474

Page 212: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display window. Click Export to export all contents in the current PCI table.

Figure 3-1 Exporting LTE PCI planning results

The U-Net supports the exporting of planning results in XLS, CSV, and TXT files, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-2 Template of exporting PCI planning results

2. The U-Net supports the exporting of the cluster information about the segmental capacity expansion.

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display window. Click Export PCI Block Configuration to export the planning information about the segmental capacity expansion.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 192 of 474

Page 213: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting the cluster information about PCIs that support the segmental capacity expansion

The U-Net supports the exporting of planning results in CFG files, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-2 Template for exporting PCI planning results (cluster information)

Filtering and Auditing Planning Results1. Filtering Planning Results

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display window and choose Filter.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 193 of 474

Page 214: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Filtering LTE PCIs

The following window is displayed:

Figure 3-2 Filtering LTE PCI results

Filter Target: indicates the range of cells to be filtered. All indicates all cells on the entire network and Planning indicates cells in the planning scope.

Max Interference Distance(km): indicates the maximum interference distance. When cells are filtered, the maximum interference distance is used to calculate the layer-0 neighboring base stations of the cells to be filtered. Cells whose distances are greater than the maximum interference distance are not collected.

None: No condition is specified.

Reuse Tier: indicates the cells where the number of PCI reuse layers is smaller than or equal to the set value. The maximum interference distance needs to be set.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 194 of 474

Page 215: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Reuse Distance (km): indicates the cells where the PCI reuse distance is smaller than or equal to the set value. The maximum interference distance needs to be set.

Same PCI MOD6 Ratio: indicates the proportion of cells that have the same PCI mode 6 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations. The maximum interference distance needs to be set. The value of Number of Antenna Ports is 1.

Same PCI MOD3 Ratio: indicates the proportion of cells that have the same PCI mode 3 with the specified cell on the corresponding layer-0 base stations. The maximum interference distance needs to be set. The value of Number of Antenna Ports is equal to or greater than 2.

You can select only one from the preceding five conditions to filter LTE PCI results.

After configuring the condition, click OK. The cells that meet the filter condition are displayed in the PCI table.

2. Auditing Planning Results

Right-click the planning result table to display the PCI Planning Display window and choose Audit.

Figure 3-1 Auditing LTE PCI results

The following window is displayed:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 195 of 474

Page 216: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Setting the auditing of LTE PCI results

Parameters in the Audit window are the same as those in the Filter window. The difference is that you can simultaneously select cells that meet multiple conditions. After you click OK, a excel sheet is generated. One worksheet is generated for one audit condition. After you open an excel worksheet, the following texts are displayed, showing the statistics information about cells that meet conditions.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 196 of 474

Page 217: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Displaying the statistics of LTE PCI results

3.3.3 Checking the PCI PlanningFor a running network, the PCI planning is continuously changing due to causes such as capacity expansion. Therefore, you need to periodically check whether the PCI distribution is reasonable.

The principle for checking the PCI planning is to check whether the PCI distribution is interleaving. When the number of cell ports is equal to or greater than 2, check whether the PCI Mod3 distribution is interleaving. When the number of cell ports is 1, check whether the PCI Mod6 distribution is interleaving.

Importing Cells Whose PCIs Have Been Planned

PCIs can be imported when the cell information is imported for a new project.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 197 of 474

Page 218: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Importing the cell PCI information

Viewing Planning Results

See section 3.3.2

Checking PCIs

On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer plane, right-click LTE PCI Planning and choose Open PCI Codes to display the PCI table.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 198 of 474

Page 219: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Checking PCIs

In the PCI display window, right-click a cell and choose Audit. For details, see section 3.3.1.7. You can simultaneously select cells that meet multiple conditions. Generally, all cells are selected. Click OK. The checking result is generated and saved in an excel worksheet. You can check the excel worksheet to check whether the PCI planning is reasonable.

Generally, you need to focus on the Reuse Tier and Reuse Distance tab pages to find cells whose reuse tiers or reuse distances do not meet requirements. In addition, check whether the PCI planning is reasonable based on the actual situation. Manually modify the PCI planning if it is unreasonable.

3.4 PRACH Planning

3.4.1 Setting PRACH Planning ParametersTo set PRACH planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 199 of 474

Page 220: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for PRACH planning

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

*Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

*High Speed Data rate in a cell.

Radius(m) Radius of a cell. (The radius of an existing cell must be imported.)

Min Root Sequence Index Minimum ZC root sequence of a cell. (The minimum ZC root sequence of a cell must be imported.)

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PRACH reuse tiers. (The value of this parameter is determined based on neighbor relationships.)

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

Step 4 Set LTE-TDD cell parameters.

Table 3-1 Settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters for PRACH planning

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

*Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 200 of 474

Page 221: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Channel Index Channel index.

*High Speed Data rate in a cell.

Radius(m) Radius of a cell. (The radius of an existing cell must be imported.)

Min Root Sequence Index Minimum ZC root sequence of a cell. (The minimum ZC root sequence of a cell must be imported.)

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Number of PRACH reuse tiers. (The value of this parameter is determined based on neighbor relationships.)

*Preamble Format Preamble sequence, which is used for a user to access a cell randomly.

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

----End

3.4.2 PRANCH Planning of a New Network

Setting Planning Parameters

On the Operation tab page on the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE PRACH Planning and choose Automatic Allocation, as shown in Figure 3-1 (an example of LTE-FDD).

Figure 3-1 Window for setting PRACH parameters

The window for setting parameters is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 201 of 474

Page 222: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Window for setting parameters

The parameters are as follows:

Calculate Cell Radius: indicates whether to re-calculate the radius of the planning cell. If this option is not selected, the cell radius set for an NE is used. If this option is selected, the cell radius is re-calculated.

Propagation Radius: indicates that the cell radius is calculated by using the calculation radius of the propagation model. The concrete algorithm is as follows:

Cell radium = Radius of the propagation model x Propagation Radius Factor

Coverage Radius: indicates that the cell radius is calculated by using the signal coverage of cells. You need to set Min Signal Level(dBm), the minimal level threshold of the coverage. Besides Min Signal Level(dBm), you can set the following optional parameters:

Shadowing taken into account: indicates whether shadow fading is taken into account during the calculation of the signal coverage of cells.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%): indicates the proportion of the strength of receive signals greater than the level threshold at the cell edge coverage.

Indoor Coverage: indicates whether the indoor coverage is taken into account.

Area: selects the area where PRACHs are to be planned. You can select all the cells in an area or click Cell Filter to select only the cells to be planned in the

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 202 of 474

Page 223: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

area. In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.

Cell Filter: After you click Cell Filter, the cell filter window is displayed. You can accurately set the cells to be planned, as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Filtering planning cells

Running the PRACH Auto-Planning

After setting parameters in section "Setting Planning Parameters", you can click Run to run the PRACH auto-planning.

Figure 3-1 Running the PRACH auto-planning

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 203 of 474

Page 224: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

II. 4Viewing PRACH Planning Results

You can view PRACH planning results in any of the following ways:

1. You can view PRACH planning results in the planning result window.

After you click Run, the PRACH auto-planning is started. After the PRACH auto-planning is complete, the PRACH planning result is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Window of the PRACH planning result

The parameters are as follows:

Cell Name: indicates the name of a cell.

HighSpeed: indicates whether the cell is a high-speed cell. In PRACH planning, high-speed cells are preferentially planned.

NCS: indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zero-correlated cells allocated for a cell. The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACH planning. The possible values of this parameter are as follows:

High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82, 100, 128, 158, 202, or 237

Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59, 76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419

Cell Radius: indicates the radius of a cell.

Existed Min Root Sequence Index: indicates the existing start ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Suggested Start Root Sequence Index: indicates the planned start ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Suggested End Root Sequence Index: indicates the planned end ZC root sequence index of the cell.

Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index: indicates the confirmed start ZC root sequence index.

Confirmed End Root Sequence Index: indicates the confirmed end ZC root sequence index.

Reuse Tier (Topology): indicates the minimal number of reuse tiers based on the geographical location.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 204 of 474

Page 225: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Reuse Distance: indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimal reuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.

Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates the minimal number of reuse tiers based on neighboring relationship.

Actual Required Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates the actually required number of reuse tiers when resources are allocated to cells.

Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor): indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is reduced when resources are allocated to cells.

After the auto-planning is complete, you can view the planning result in any of the following ways:

On the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE PRACH Planning and choose Open PRACH Parameter.

Figure 3-2 Displaying the window of the planning result

The window of the PRACH planning result is displayed.

2. You can display the existing start/end ZC root sequence index of the cell on the GIS map.

On the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click Transceiver and choose Display Setting.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 205 of 474

Page 226: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (1)

On the Label Display tab page of the Display Field window, remove Min Root Sequence Index to the Selected Fields area and click OK.

Figure 3-2 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (2)

The existing start/end ZC root sequence index of each cell is displayed on the GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-3.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 206 of 474

Page 227: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Viewing the planning result on the GIS map (3)

3. View reuse cells on the GIS map.

Select LTE PRACH Planning on the Project Explorer Pane, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Selecting LTE PRACH Planning

Select a transceiver on the GIS map. The transceivers that have ZC root reuse relationship with the selected transceiver are displayed on the GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 207 of 474

Page 228: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Displaying transceivers that have reuse relationship with the selected transceiver on the GIS map

Checking PRACH Planning Results

Checking PRACH planning results refers to check the reuse distance and the number of reuse tiers (including the number of topology tiers and the number of neighboring cell tiers) and check whether the reuse distance of the ZC root is further enough and whether the number of reuse tiers is large enough.

When collecting the number of reuse tiers, you can set the number of reuse tiers required by the customer so that only the reuse tiers within the set threshold are collected. Therefore, the checking speed is improved. The operation procedure is as follows:

In the planning result window, right-click a record and choose Set Output Reuse Neighbor Tier.

Figure 3-1 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (1)

In the displayed Set Output Reuse Neighbor Tier window, set Limit Output Reuse Neighbor Tier and click OK. For example, set Limit Output Reuse Neighbor Tier to 0.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 208 of 474

Page 229: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (2)

After clicking OK, results in the Reuse Tier(Neighbor) column are changed. Cells are identified if the number of reuse tiers exceeds the threshold, as shown in Figure 3-3

Figure 3-3 Setting the number of reuse tiers to be checked (3)

Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results

If you are not satisfied with the automatic PRACH planning results, you can modify the results by double-clicking Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index. Then, modify the results when the cell result is editable, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Manually adjusting planning results (1)

After the planning results are modified, the ZC root sequence and its reuse relations are calculated again. For example, when the start ZC root sequence of the first cell shown in Figure 3-1 is set to 207, the following result is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 209 of 474

Page 230: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Manually adjusting planning results (2)

Submitting Planning Results

In the planning result window, right-click a record and choose Commit to submit planning results to the NEs.

Figure 3-1 Submitting planning results

Exporting PRACH Planning Results

In the PRACH planning result window, right-click a record and choose Export.

Figure 3-1 Exporting planning results (1)

In the displayed window, select the columns to be exported.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 210 of 474

Page 231: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Exporting planning results (2)

Click Export to export planning results.

3.5 Frequency Planning

3.5.1 Setting Frequency Planning ParametersTo set frequency planning parameters in parameter templates to be imported, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 211 of 474

Page 232: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Settings of LTE-FDD cell parameters for frequency planning

Parameter (* Indicates a Mandatory Parameter)

Description

*Transceiver Name Name of the transceiver to which a cell belongs.

*Cell Name Name of a cell.

*Active Indicates whether to activate the current cell.

*Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

*Channel Index Channel index.

Step 4 Set LTE-TDD cell parameters.

The settings of LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as those of LTE-FDD cell parameters.

----End

3.5.2 Frequency Planning in 1x1 + ICIC Networking

Setting Planning Parameters

On the Operation tab page on the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net, right-click LTE Frequency Planning and choose Automatic Allocation….

Figure 3-1 Displaying the window of setting planning parameters

The window of setting planning parameters is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 212 of 474

Page 233: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Window of setting planning parameters

Parameter Description:

Parameters on the General tab page are described as follows:

Min Interference Distance(km): indicates the minimal interference distance, that is, the minimal distance between lay 0 base stations.

Select Area: indicates the planning area. You can perform the planning on the entire network or in the polygon area.

Filter: After you click Filter, the Filter window is displayed. You can filter the base stations to be planned.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 213 of 474

Page 234: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Filtering planning cells

Frequency Reuse Pattern: indicates the frequency reuse mode, that is, 1x1 mode or 1x3 mode.

Parameters on the Frequency tab page are described as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 214 of 474

Page 235: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Window of selecting bands and frequencies

Frequency Band: indicates a frequency band. All frequency bands in the Frequency Band drop-down list are displayed for your selection. The selected frequency band is interacted with the following frequencies, that is, the changes of frequency bands will lead to the changes of frequencies.

Channel Index: indicates the channel index to be allocated to the site. For the 1x1 networking mode, only one channel index can be selected. For the 1x3 networking mode, three channel indexes can be selected.

Running the Automatic Frequency Planning

After the preceding parameters are set, click Run to run the automatic frequency planning.

Viewing Planning Results

After operations described in section are complete, a planning result window is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 215 of 474

Page 236: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Planning result window

Parameter Description:

Site: indicates a site name.

Transceiver: indicates a transceiver name.

Frequency: indicates a frequency band.

Bandwidth: indicates the allocated bandwidth.

Channel Index: indicates a channel index.

Edge Frequency(UL): indicates the frequency band used by CEUs in the uplink service when the ICIC is enabled.

Edge Frequency(DL): indicates the frequency band used by CEUs in the downlink service when the ICIC is enabled.

Submitting Planning Results

After the planning is complete, if the planning results are acceptable, you can click Commit in the planning result window shown in I. Step 1Figure 3-1 to submit the planning results to NEs.

Exporting Planning Results

If you need to export the planning results, you can click Export in the planning result window shown in I. Step 1Figure 3-1The data export window is displayed. You can select the data line to be exported.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 216 of 474

Page 237: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting planning results

Checking Planning Results1. Check the statistics data about the frequency planning.

After submitting planning results, you can check the allocation of channel indexes to sites and the allocation of neighboring channel indexes to sites.

Right-click LTE Frequency Planning and choose Frequency Statistics.

Figure 3-1 Displaying the frequency statistics window

The Frequency Statistics window is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 217 of 474

Page 238: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Window of statistics of planning results (1)

You need to set Frequency Band and Channel Index. After the parameters are set, you can click Find to display all sites that obtain the frequency and its inter-frequency sites.

For example, Figure 3-3 shows all sites with the channel index of 2 in the 2110 FDD – 1.4 MHz band and its inter-frequency sites, that is, sites with the channel index of 1 or 3 in the 2110 FDD – 1.4MHz band.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 218 of 474

Page 239: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Window of statistics of planning results (2)

The Same Frequency Statistics table shows the sites with the customized frequency bands and channel index. The Neighbor Frequency Statistics table shows the inter-frequency sites.

2. Render the GIS color of statistics results.

After operations described in section "Submitting Planning Results" are complete, click Color to set the rendering color of target sites and that of inter-frequency sites.

Figure 3-1 Window of setting the rendering color on the GIS map

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 219 of 474

Page 240: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description:

Same Frequency: indicates the color of a site with the specified frequency.

Neighbor Frequency: indicates the color of a inter-frequency site with the specified frequency.

After the color is set, click OK. Click Geometry. These sites have been rendered on the GIS map.

Figure 3-2 Displaying auditing results on the GIS map

Displaying Frequency Planning Results on the GIS Map

After submitting planning results to NEs, you can right-click Transceiver on the Network tab page of the Project Explorer pane and choose Display Setting.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 220 of 474

Page 241: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (1)

The Display Field window is displayed.

Figure 3-2 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (2)

On the Label Display tab page, choose Channel Index from the Available Fields area and click to remove Channel Index to the Selected Fields area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 221 of 474

Page 242: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (3)

Click OK. The frequency planning results are displayed on the GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Displaying frequency planning results on the GIS map (4)

3.5.3 Frequency Planning in 1x3 Networking Mode

Setting Planning Parameters

You can refer to section 3.5.2 The only difference is that you need to set Frequency Reuse Pattern to 1x3 and select three channel indexes.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 222 of 474

Page 243: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Displaying the parameter setting window

Figure 3-2 Setting the 1x3 networking mode

Running the Automatic Frequency Planning

After the preceding parameters are set, click Run to run the automatic frequency planning.

Viewing Planning Results

See section 3.5.2 ‘Checking Planning Results.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 223 of 474

Page 244: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Submitting Planning Results

See section "Checking PRACH Planning Results."

Exporting Planning Results

See section "Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results."

Checking Planning Results

See section "Manually Adjusting PRACH Planning Results."

Displaying Frequency Planning Results on the GIS Map

See section "Submitting Planning Results."

3.6 RF PlanningThe LTE RF auto-planning function is used to adjust the antenna downtilt, antenna azimuth, and power of the reference signal. The purpose is to meet the target values set by users and decrease the dependence on the experience of engineers for the live network and decrease the number of repeatedly adjusting parameters.

3.6.1 Setting Planning ParametersOn the U-Net, create a new project and import related engineering parameters or open an existed project. On the Operation tab page of the Project Explorer pane, right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New to start the RF auto-planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Creating a RF planning group

After the RF auto-planning is started, you can set related planning parameters in the displayed RF Planning window, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 224 of 474

Page 245: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 General tab page in the RF Planning window

Set the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR.

The thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR refer to the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR expected by users. The thresholds cannot be set on the tab page on the interface. You can set the thresholds in the RfConfig.xml file which is under the same directory with the U-Net executable file (Huawei.UNet.exe). You can set the parameters in the end of the file, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 225 of 474

Page 246: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Setting the thresholds of RSRP and RS SINR

Setting Parameters on the General Tab Page in the RF Planning Window

The General tab page is shown in I. Step 1Figure 3-2. Parameters on the General tab page are described as follows:

Name: indicates the name of an RF planning group. The default value is Group0. You can modify the value as required.

Analysis Area: indicates the analysis area. Cells in this area participate in the adjustment of RF parameters. You can determine the scope of the analysis area by choosing the polygon.

Simulation Area: indicates the simulation area. Cells in this area are considered for the RF planning. After the RF adjustment is complete, you need to monitor the overall effect after the modification within an area. The monitored area is the simulation area. If only one polygon is imported in the project, the same polygon is selected for both the analysis area and the simulation area. If multiple polygons are imported in the project, the simulation area must contain the analysis area. For example, the analysis area is Polygon_Draw_1 and the simulation area is Polygon_Draw_2, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 226 of 474

Page 247: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Location relations of simulation areas and analysis areas

Max Iteration Count: indicates the maximum number of iterations. The default value is 50.

Resolution: indicates the precision in calculation. Generally, the value of this parameter is the same as the map precision and the cell propagation precision. The setting of the precision has great impact on the calculation. The precision affects not only the reliability of the calculation result but also the calculation time. The higher the precision, the longer the calculation time. You can modify the calculation precision as required.

RSRP Target Ratio: indicates the percentage of the areas where the RSRP is equal to or greater than the RSRP threshold to the simulation areas. It is an expected effect of the RSRP after the RF planning.

RS SINR Target Ratio: indicates the percentage of the areas where the RS SINR is equal to or greater than the RS SINR threshold to the simulation areas. It is an expected effect of the RS SINR after the RF planning.

RSRP Fitness Weight: indicates the weight of the RSRP performance study of a cell. RS SINR Fitness Weight + RSRP Fitness Weight = 1. It specifies the weight of the RSRP during the planning. The default value is 0.5. This indicates that RSRP has the same weight as RS SINR.

RS SINR Fitness Weight: indicates the weight of the RS SINR performance study of a cell. RSRP Fitness Weight + RS SINR Fitness Weight = 1. It specifies the weight of the RS SINR during the planning.

Calculate Now: indicates whether to perform the RF auto-planning immediately. If this parameter is selected, after the parameters are set,

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 227 of 474

Page 248: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

you can click OK to perform the RF auto-planning immediately. If this parameter is not selected, after parameters are set, you can return to the Project Explorer pane of the U-Net. Then, right-click the created RF planning group and choose Calculate to perform the RF auto-planning, as shown in I. Step 1Figure 3-1.

Setting Parameters on the Control Parameter Tab Page in the RF Planning Window

Figure 3-1 Control Parameter tab page in the RF Planning window

Parameters are described as follows:

Population Size: indicates the size of a population, that is, the total number of individuals participated in the calculation in each iteration.

Selection box: indicates whether the parameter participates in the adjustment. If a parameter does not participate in the adjustment, deselect the parameter.

The settings of three parameters are basically the same. The following is an example of setting Antenna Tilt.

Max Value: indicates the maximum downtilt angle.

Min Value: indicates the minimal downtilt angle.

Max Range: indicates the maximum adjustment range of the downtilt angle.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 228 of 474

Page 249: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Min Range: indicates the minimal adjustment range of the downtilt angle.

Step Size: indicates the step length at which the downtilt angle is adjusted.

The following is an example for describing meanings of these parameters.

The current downtilt angle of a cell is 3°. The setting of the downtilt angle is as follows:

You need to set the following parameters:

Set Max Value to 14. It indicates that the maximum downtilt angle of the cell is 14° during the RF planning. The value is not related to the initial downtilt angle of the cell.

Set Min Value to 10. It indicates that the minimal downtilt angle of the cell is –10° during the RF planning. The value is not related to the initial downtilt angle of the cell.

Set Max Range to 7. It indicates that the maximum downtilt angle of the cell is 10° (3 + 7 = 10) during the RF planning. The value is related to the initial downtilt angle of the cell. Max Range defines the maximum adjustment range of the downtilt angle based on the initial downtilt angle of the cell.

Set Min Range to -5. It indicates that the minimal downtilt angle of the cell is –2° (3 –5 =–2) during the RF planning. The value is related to the initial downtilt angle of the cell. Min Range defines the minimal adjustment range of the downtilt angle based on the initial downtilt angle of the cell.

Set Step Size to 1. It indicates that the step length is 1 during the RF planning of the cell, that is, the downtilt angle of the cell is adjusted at each degree.

3.6.2 Running the RF PlanningAfter set parameters on the preceding tab pages, click OK. If Calculate Now is selected on the General tab page, the RF planning is performed immediately. If Calculate Now is not selected, right-click a created planning group on the Project Explorer pane and choose Calculate to perform the RF planning, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 229 of 474

Page 250: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Running the RF planning

During the running of the RF planning, the progress of the RF auto-planning is displayed in the Event Viewer window of the U-Net. The changes of Fitness (red line), RSRP Percent (blue line), and RS SINR Percent (green line) as the number of iterations are displayed in the LTE RF Planning window.

Figure 3-2 Interface during the RF planning

During the RF planning, you can right-click the RF planning group and choose Stop to stop the RF planning group that is running.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 230 of 474

Page 251: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.6.3 Viewing RF Planning ResultsWhen the progress bar displayed in the Event Viewer window disappears, the RF planning is complete. Right-click an RF planning group (such as Group0) and choose Result, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Displaying RF planning results

The RF Result window is displayed. The RF Result window has four tab pages, General, Graph, Cell Parameters, and Quality. These tab pages are described as follows:

General Tab Page

The General tab page mainly displays the best fitness of each iteration, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Fitness = Weight of RSRP x Percentage of areas where the RSRP meets the RSRP threshold + Weight of RS SINR x Percentage of areas where the RS SINR meets the RS SINR threshold

Fitness: indicates the overall fitness value. The fitness represents the network quality. The greater the value, the better the network quality. The smaller the value, the poorer the network quality.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 231 of 474

Page 252: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 General tab page in the RF Result window

Graph Tab Page

The Graph tab page shows the changes of Fitness (red line), RSRP Percent (blue line), and RS SINR Percent (green line) as the number of iterations.

Figure 3-1 Graph tab page in the RF Result window

Cell Parameters Tab Page

The Cell Parameters tab page shows the comparison of the azimuth, downtilt angle, reference signal power, and fitness in each cell before and after the optimization, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 232 of 474

Page 253: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Cell Parameters tab page in the RF Result window

Iteration: indicates the number of iterations. This parameter is closely related to Action and Commit. That is, the exported data and submitted data is data of the iteration set by Iteration.

Action: indicates exporting the parameter comparison table of an iteration.

Commit: indicates submitting parameters of an iteration to the project.

Transceiver: indicates the transceiver of the cell.

Original Azimuth: indicates the initial azimuth of a cell.

Optimized Azimuth: indicates the azimuth of a cell after calculation.

Original RS Power: indicates the initial RS power of a cell.

Optimized RS Power: indicates the RS power of a cell after calculation.

Original Tilt: indicates the initial downtilt angle of a cell.

Optimized Tilt: indicates the downtilt angle of a cell after calculation.

Original Fitness: indicates the initial fitness value of a cell. The fitness value represents cell performance. The higher the fitness value, the better the cell performance.

Optimized Fitness: indicates the fitness value of a cell after calculation.

Quality Tab Page

The Quality tab page shows the coverage prediction comparison figure of RSRP and RS SINR before and after the optimization. You can view the coverage prediction comparison figure of any two iterations by setting the values of Iteration and Compare Iteration.

The RSRP coverage prediction comparison figure is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 233 of 474

Page 254: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RSRP coverage prediction figure

The RS SINR coverage prediction comparison figure is as follows:

Figure 3-2 Quality tab page in the RF Result window — RS SINR coverage prediction figure

3.6.4 Exporting RF Planning ResultsOn the Cell Parameters tab page, you can export RF planning results. Click Action. The Export button is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Then, click Export to display the dialog box for selecting the format to export RF planning results, as shown in Figure 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 234 of 474

Page 255: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting RF planning results

Figure 3-2 Format for exporting RF planning results

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 235 of 474

Page 256: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.6.5 Submitting RF Planning ResultsOn the Cell Parameters tab page, click Commit. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Click OK to directly update optimization results to NEs. The optimization results of the latest iteration are the best results. Therefore, the optimization results of the latest iteration are submitted to NEs.

Figure 3-1 Dialog box displayed after clicking Commit

3.7 Capacity SimulationUsing the U-Net, you can view the actual network capacity from multiple dimensions.

The following contents describe operations in the LTE-TDD network. The operations in the LTE-FDD network are similar to those in the LTE-TDD network. In the following contents, the operations in the LTE-FDD network are the same as those in the LTE-TDD network unless otherwise specified.

3.7.1 Setting Capacity Simulation ParametersTo set capacity simulation parameters in parameter templates to be imported, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.

For details, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 236 of 474

Page 257: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 LTE-FDD cell parameters for capacity simulation

Parameter Description

Transceiver Name Name of the transceiver to which a cell belongs.

Cell Name Name of a cell.

Active Indicates whether to activate the current cell.

Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

Channel Index Channel index.

Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power.

Target Load(DL) Target load on the downlink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL) Target load on the uplink. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the uplink. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

Edge Frequency Style(DL) Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the downlink. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the uplink. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL) Indicates whether to perform frequency scheduling on the uplink.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL) Indicates whether to perform frequency scheduling on the downlink.

Max Schedule Users(UL) Maximum number of scheduled users on the uplink.

Max Schedule Users(DL) Maximum number of scheduled users on the downlink.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 237 of 474

Page 258: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB) Number of RBs on the uplink control channel.

Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol)

Number of OFDM symbols on the downlink PDCCH.

PBCH to RS(dB) Offset of the PBCH power relative to the reference signal power (unit: dB).

SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative to the reference signal power (unit: dB).

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB)

SINR access threshold of the downlink reference signal.

PB Index for the offset of the power of category-A and category-B symbols for data REs relative to the reference signal RE power.

Schedule Policy Scheduling policy.

PA(dB) Offset of the PDCCH RE transmit power relative to the reference signal RE transmit power.

CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by CCUs relative to the reference signal power. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by CEUs relative to the reference signal power. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

Alpha Open-loop power control parameter indicating the coefficient for pass loss compensation in a cell.

Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop power control.

TTI Bundling Indicates whether to consider the TTI bundling.

VMIMO Indicates whether to consider the virtual MIMO (VMIMO).

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 238 of 474

Page 259: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

PSIC Advanced receiver (AR) feature introduced to U-Net V300R009 for capacity simulation. This feature is enabled only when the following conditions are met: Two receive antennas are installed

on the base station. The VMIMO feature is enabled.

The uplink throughput for data services is increased after this feature is enabled.

PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

COMP Indicates whether to enable the coordinated multi-point transmission/reception technology (CoMP) function.

You can enable the CoMP function for the uplink in a base station, thereby improving the cell edge capacity and the average cell throughput.This parameter is not selected by default.

Channel Relativity Indicates whether to consider the channel correlation.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Transmission Mode Transmission mode.

For details about the value of this parameter, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-5.

Step 4 Set LTE-TDD cell parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 239 of 474

Page 260: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 LTE-TDD parameters for capacity simulation

Parameter Description

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of the site to which a transceiver belongs.

Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.

Frequency Band Information about a frequency band.

Channel Index Channel index.

Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power (unit: dBm).

Target Load(DL) Target load on the downlink.

Target Load(UL) Target load on the uplink.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the uplink. The Reuse3 status (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 240 of 474

Page 261: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Edge Frequency Style(DL) Method of allocating frequencies to CEUs on the downlink.

When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3) is supported.

When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the Reuse3 state (Style1, Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 state (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full-power Reuse1 state (AllPowerReuse1), and low-power Reuse1 state (LowPowerReuse1) are supported.

When this parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state, the value of CCU PA is used as the cell centers and the value of CEU PA is used as the cell edges for all users in the cell. When this parameter is set to AllPowerReuse1, the value of PA is used as the PA values for all users in the cell. When this parameter is set to LowPowerReuse1, the value of CCU PA value is used as the PA values for all users in the cell. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink.

When the ICIC function is disabled, the value of Actual IoT(UL) specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When the ICIC function is enabled, the value of CCU IoT is used at the cell center and the value of CEU IoT is used on the cell edge.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 241 of 474

Page 262: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC on the downlink.

When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the value of PA specified in the cell attributes is used across the cell.

When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, the ICIC function is enabled. In this case, the value of CCU PA is used at the cell center and the value of CEU PA is used on the cell edge.

When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, the ICIC function can be automatically enabled and the edge band mode can be automatically configured. You can plan edge band modes and then deliver the band modes without configuring this parameter for cells one by one.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(UL) Indicates whether to perform frequency scheduling on the uplink.

Frequency Selectivity Schedule(DL) Indicates whether to perform frequency scheduling on the downlink.

Max Schedule Users(UL) Maximum number of scheduled users on the uplink.

Max Schedule Users(DL) Maximum number of scheduled users on the downlink.

Control Channel Overhead(UL)(RB) Number of RBs on the uplink control channel.

Control Channel Overhead(DL)(Symbol)

Number of OFDM symbols on the downlink PDCCH.

PBCH to RS(dB) Offset of the PBCH power relative to the reference signal power (unit: dB).

SCH to RS(dB) Offset of the SCH power relative to the reference signal power (unit: dB).

RS Power(dBm) Power of the reference signal on a subcarrier (unit: dBm).

RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB)

SINR access threshold of the downlink reference signal.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 242 of 474

Page 263: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

PB Index for the offset of the power of category-A and category-B symbols for data REs to the reference signal RE power.

Schedule Policy Scheduling policy.

PA(dB) Offset of the PDCCH RE transmit power relative to the reference signal RE transmit power.

CCU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by CCUs relative to the reference signal power. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

CEU PA(dB) Offset of the power of PDSCH category-A symbols received by CEUs relative to the reference signal power. (This parameter is mandatory when the ICIC function is enabled.)

Alpha Open-loop power control parameter indicating the coefficient for pass loss compensation in a cell.

Po(dBm) Power parameter for open-loop power control.

TTI Bundling Indicates whether to consider the TTI bundling.

Multi-user Beamforming Indicates whether to enable the multi-user beamforming function during downlink scheduling.

VMIMO Indicates whether to consider the virtual MIMO (VMIMO).

PSIC Advanced receiver (AR) feature introduced to U-Net V300R009 for capacity simulation. This feature is enabled only when the following conditions are met: Two receive antennas are installed

on the base station. The VMIMO feature is enabled.

The uplink throughput for data services is increased after this feature is enabled.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 243 of 474

Page 264: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

PUSCH IRC Indicates whether to enable the PUSCH interference rejection combining (IRC) function.

For the PUSCH, the PUSCH IRC function is enabled when colored interference is severe. This reduces the interference power of combined signals and improves uplink gains.

This parameter is not selected by default.

COMP Indicates whether to enable the coordinated multi-point transmission/reception technology (CoMP) function.

You can enable the CoMP function for the uplink in a base station, thereby improving the cell edge capacity and the average cell throughput.This parameter is not selected by default.

Channel Relativity Indicates whether to consider the channel correlation.

This parameter is not selected by default.

Transmission Mode Transmission mode.

For details about the value of this parameter, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-5.

----End

3.7.2 Creating a Simulation Group

Prerequisites Base stations and cells must have been available (mandatory).

A traffic map must have been created (mandatory).

The geographic data must have been imported (optional).

The calculation area must have been created (optional).

Creating a calculation area refers to creating a polygon where contains the base stations to be simulated.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 244 of 474

Page 265: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Procedure

Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab page. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.

Figure 3-1 Creating a simulation group (1)

Step 2 Right-click Simulations and choose New to display the Simulation Group Properties window.

Figure 3-1 Creating a simulation group (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 245 of 474

Page 266: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

After the following parameters are set, click Apply or OK to create a simulation group.

Name: indicates the name of a traffic simulation group.

Site Corr: indicates the shadow fading factor on the base station side.

Number of Simulations: indicates the number of simulations. A larger number of simulations indicates more precise simulation results but requires longer calculation time.

Number of Iterations: indicates the number of iterations. This parameter is used for the SingleRan simulation. You do not need to pay attention to this parameter.

Calculate Now: indicates whether to perform simulation calculation immediately.

Figure 3-2 Creating a simulation group (3)

Select Traffic Maps to be Used: indicates a traffic map to be selected.

Select Polygon: indicates a calculation area to be selected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 246 of 474

Page 267: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Creating a simulation group (4)

Number of TTI: indicates the number of transmission time intervals (TTIs). The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network information according toTTI. A shorter TTI increases the precision of simulation results but requires longer calculation period. Generally, the convergence speed of the LTE-FDD network is quicker than that of the LTE-TDD network. Therefore, the default value is 500 in the LTE-FDD network and is 1250 in the LTE-TDD network.

UL IoT Convergence Threshold: indicates the uplink IoT convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.

DL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the downlink throughput convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.

UL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the uplink throughput convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.

DL Load Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the downlink load convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.

UL Load Convergence Threshold(%): indicates the uplink load convergence threshold, which is used for checking whether a network is converged.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 247 of 474

Page 268: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.7.3 Running the Simulation Group

Figure 3-1 Running a simulation group (1)

Click Calculate to run a simulation group. You can right-click the simulation group and choose Stop to stop the calculation.

Figure 3-2 Running a simulation group (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 248 of 474

Page 269: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.7.4 Viewing Capacity Simulation ResultsAfter a simulation group is calculated, you can view the simulation results in the statistics table, the map window, or the PDF or CDF diagram.

Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (on the Entire Network)

You can view the capacity simulation statistics results on the entire network, including the statistics information on the entire network, site statistics information, and cell statistics information.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (1)

On the interface of the LTE-FDD network, LTDTDD is LTE.

Parameters on the Statistics tab page are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 249 of 474

Page 270: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (2)

Request area

− Number of TTI: indicates the number of TTIs. The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network information according toTTI. A shorter TTI increases the precision of simulation results but requires longer calculation period.

− Average Users: indicates the average total number of users attempting to gain access to the network. Average Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the average required downlink throughput on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Average Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the average required uplink throughput on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Users: indicates the number of users attempting to gain access to each service.

− Uplink: indicates the number of uplink users attempting to gain access to each service.

− Downlink: indicates the number of downlink users attempting to gain access to each service.

− Max Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the maximum required uplink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Min Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the minimal required uplink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Average Throughput Demand(UL): indicates the average required uplink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 250 of 474

Page 271: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

− Max Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the maximum required downlink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Min Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the minimal required downlink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Average Throughput Demand(DL): indicates the average required downlink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

Results area

− Number of TTI: indicates the number of TTIs. The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network information according toTTI. A shorter TTI increases the precision of simulation results but requires longer calculation period. This parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.

− Stat Start Time: indicates the statistics start TTI. This parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.

− IsConvergence: indicates whether a snapshot is converged. This parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.

− Average Users: indicates the average total number and percentage of users that actually gain access to the entire network.

− Actual MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the actual average throughput at the uplink physical layer on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL): indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the uplink server layer on the entire network.

− Actual Application Throughput(UL): indicates the actual average throughput at the uplink server layer on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(UL): indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the uplink server layer on the entire network.

− Actual MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the actual average throughput at the downlink physical layer on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL): indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the downlink server layer on the entire network.

− Actual Application Throughput(DL): indicates the actual average throughput at the downlink server layer on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual Application Throughput Standard Deviation(DL): indicates the actual standard deviation of the average throughput at the downlink server layer on the entire network.

− Service User: indicates the number and percentage of users that successfully gain access to each service.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 251 of 474

Page 272: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

− Downlink: indicates the number of downlink users that gain access to each service.

− Downlink Standard Deviation: indicates the standard deviation of the downlink users that gain access to each service.

− Uplink: indicates the number of uplink users that gain access to each service.

− Uplink Standard Deviation: indicates the standard deviation of the uplink users that gain access to each service.

− Offline User: indicates the number and percentage of offline users corresponding to each service.

− Failed User: indicates the number and percentage of failed users corresponding to each service.

− Actual MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the actual uplink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(UL): indicates the standard deviation of the actual uplink throughput of each service on the entire network.

− Actual MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the actual downlink throughput of each service on the entire network. The unit is Mbit/s or kbit/s.

− Actual MAC Throughput Standard Deviation(DL): indicates the standard deviation of the actual downlink throughput of each service on the entire network.

− Breakdown per unsuccessful reason: indicates the statistics of the simulation users in unsuccessful state. This parameter is available only in the properties of a single snapshot.

Parameters on the Sites(Average) tab page are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 252 of 474

Page 273: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (3)

Site: indicates the name of a site.

Total MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at the physical layer on the uplink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.

Total Application Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at the server layer on the uplink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.

Total MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at the physical layer on the downlink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.

Total Application Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the total throughput at the server layer on the downlink of a site. The unit is kbit/s.

LTEFTP(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the physical layer corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEFTP(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEFTP(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEFTP(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the FTP service.

LTEVoIP(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEVoIP(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEVoIP(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEVoIP(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the VoIP service.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 253 of 474

Page 274: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

LTEWebBrowsing(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the physical layer corresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEWebBrowsing(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEWebBrowsing(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEWebBrowsing(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEVideoConferencing(UL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the physical layer corresponding to the Video Conferencing service.

LTEVideoConferencing(UL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of uplink users at the application layer corresponding to the Video Conferencing service.

LTEVideoConferencing(DL MAC)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the physical layer corresponding to the Video Conferencing service.

LTEVideoConferencing(DL Application)(kbps): indicates the number of downlink users at the application layer corresponding to the Video Conferencing service.

Parameters on the Cells(Average) tab page are as follows:

Figure 3-4 Viewing simulation results on the entire network (4)

Site: indicates the name of a site.

Transceiver: indicates the name of a transceiver.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 254 of 474

Page 275: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Cell: indicates the name of a transceiver.

Tx Power(dBm): indicates the TX power. The unit is dBm.

IoT(UL)(dB): indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the volume of increased noise at the uplink. The unit is dB.

Load(UL): indicates the uplink load.

Average Used RB(UL): indicates the number of uplink RBs in use.

Load(DL): indicates the downlink load.

Average Used RB(DL): indicates the number of downlink RBs in use.

MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the uplink average throughput at the physical layer. The unit is kbit/s.

Application Throughput(UL)(kbps): indicates the uplink average throughput at the server layer. The unit is kbit/s.

MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the downlink average throughput at the physical layer. The unit is kbit/s.

Application Throughput(DL)(kbps): indicates the downlink average throughput at the server layer. The unit is kbit/s.

Service User: indicates the number of users that gain access to services.

Offline User: indicates the number of users involved in call drops.

Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (of a Single Snapshot)

You can view the statistics results of capacity simulation of a single snapshot, including the statistics information about a single snapshot, site statistics information, cell statistics information, and user statistics information.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (1)

Parameters on the Statistics tab page are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 255 of 474

Page 276: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (2)

Stat Start Time: indicates the statistics start TTI.

IsConvergence: indicates whether a snapshot is converged.

Other parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the Statistics tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.

Figure 3-3 shows parameters on the Site tab page.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 256 of 474

Page 277: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (3)

Parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the Sites (Average) tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.

Figure 3-4 shows parameters on the Cells tab page.

Figure 3-4 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (4)

Parameters: You can refer to the parameter description on the Cells (Average) tab page for viewing simulation results on the entire network.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 257 of 474

Page 278: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 shows parameters on the Mobiles tab page.

Figure 3-5 Viewing simulation results of a snapshot (5)

ID: indicates the ID of a user.

X: indicates the x-coordinate on the map of a user.

Y: indicates the y-coordinate on the map of a user.

Group Name: indicates the name of a simulation group.

SnapShot Name: indicates the name of a snapshot.

User Profiles: indicates a user type.

Service: indicates a service type.

Terminal: indicates a terminal type.

Mobility: indicates a mobility type.

Connection State: indicates the connection status. There are five user states: Satisfied, ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, and OffLine.

Best Server: indicates the best serving cell. After load control is performed, the value of BestServer changes.

Link Type: indicates the link type (uplink or downlink).

Indoor: indicates whether the terminal is used indoors.

Link Loss(UL)(dB): indicates the uplink link loss.

Link Loss(DL)(dB): indicates the downlink link loss.

RSRP(DL)(dBm): indicates the reference signal received power on the downlink.

IoT(DL)(dB): Indicates the downlink interference over thermal. The unit is dB. Simulate the last measurement value.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 258 of 474

Page 279: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

PDSCH MCS: indicates the downlink modulation coding scheme (MCS).

PUSCH MCS: indicates the uplink modulation coding scheme (MCS).

MIMO Mode: indicates the MIMO type.

Tx Power(dBm): indicates the transmit power of a terminal. The downlink user is empty.

PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the physical layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the physical layer of the PDSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the application layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps): indicates the throughput at the application layer of the PUSCH channel. The unit is kbit/s.

Average Used RB Number: indicates the average number of used RBs.

RS SINR(DL)(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the downlink reference signal. The unit is dB.

PUSCH SINR(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.

PDSCH SINR(dB): indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.

Viewing the Statistics Results of the Capacity Simulation (on the GIS Map)

1. User Classification and Display Setting

The U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, mobility type, service type, and terminal.

The U-Net supports the displaying of different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on the map.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 259 of 474

Page 280: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (2)

By clicking the icons in the Color column, you can edit the GIS display mode of users of each type. For example, click the circle on the first row. In the displayed floating window, you can modify Symbol and Fore Color of users whose status is Satisfied.

Figure 3-3 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (3)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 260 of 474

Page 281: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Field Type in the floating window corresponds to node types under Snapshot.

Figure 3-4 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (4)

2. Add display modes to the Legend window.

Step 1 Add user types and display settings to the Legend window.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (5)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 261 of 474

Page 282: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (6)

Step 2 Display the Legend window.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (7)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 262 of 474

Page 283: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (8)

3. View multiple users on the GIS map.

For example, view users whose statuses are Satisfied and OffLine on the GIS map.

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (9)

4. View detailed information about a single user on the GIS map.

On the GIS map, double-click a user icon to display the window for the detailed user information.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 263 of 474

Page 284: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (10)

Figure 3-2 Viewing simulation results on the GIS map (11)

Layer: indicates the name of a simulation group/snapshot.

Other parameters: You can refer to the statistics results of a single snapshot and parameter description on the Mobiles tab page.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 264 of 474

Page 285: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Viewing the Statistics Results of Capacity Simulation (in a PDF or CDF Chart)

Figure 3-1 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (1)

Figure 3-2 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (2)

You can choose different studies from the Item column. The CDF/PDF curve of the selected study is displayed on the right pane.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 265 of 474

Page 286: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

You can set Figure Style to CDF or PDF. The figure on the right pane is updated.

By right-clicking the figure on the right pane, you can perform operations such as Copy, Save Image As, Print, and Show Point Values.

By dragging the scroll bar, you can change the scale of the CDF/PDF curve.

By choosing Un-Zoom and Undo All Zoom/Pan, you can cancel the changing of the scale of the CDF/PDF curve.

By choosing Set Scale to Default, you can set the scale to the default value.

By clicking Export Data, you can export the detailed study values to a file. Figure 3-3 shows the exporting of throughput at the application layer of all users.

Figure 3-3 Viewing the statistics results of capacity simulation in a PDF or CDF chart (3)

The parameters are as follows:

IOT(UL): indicates the IOT on the uplink, and is the average uplink IOTs of all cells.

IOT(DL): indicates the IOT on the downlink, and is the average downlink IOTs of all users in all cells.

Load(UL): indicates the uplink load, and is the average load of all cells.

Load(DL): indicates the downlink load, and is the average load of all cells.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 266 of 474

Page 287: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Cell MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the uplink throughput, and is the average uplink throughput of all cells.

Cell MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the downlink throughput, and is the average downlink throughput of all cells.

RS SINR(DL): indicates the SINR of the downlink reference signal, and is the average RS SINR of all users in all cells.

Geometry: indicates the average geometry of all users in all cells.

User MAC Throughput(UL): indicates the average throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of all users in all cells.

User MAC Throughput(DL): indicates the average throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of all users in all cells.

User Application Throughput(UL): indicates the average throughput at the application layer on the uplink of all users in all cells.

User Application Throughput(DL): indicates the average throughput at the application layer on the downlink of all users in all cells.

User Service Time(UL): indicates the user service time on the uplink, and is the average service time of all users in all cells.

User Service Time(DL): indicates the user service time on the downlink, and is the average service time of all users in all cells.

User Actual Power: indicates the actual transmit power of a user, comprising the transmit power of each user in each cell.

Cell Actual Power: indicates the actual transmit power of a cell, and is the average actual transmit power of all cells.

PUSCH SINR: indicates the PUSCH SINR of a user, and is the average PUSCH SINR of all users in all cells.

PDSCH SINR: indicates the PDSCH SINR of a user, and is the average PDSCH SINR of all users in all cells.

Throughput: indicates the throughput trend of each TTI.

Viewing the Average Result of Multiple Network Systems of Capacity Simulation

This function is helpful for the simulation in SingleRAN networks but is not frequently used in LTE FDD networks and LTE TDD networks.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 267 of 474

Page 288: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (1)

Figure 3-2 Viewing the average result of multiple network systems (2)

3.7.5 Submitting Capacity Simulation ResultsAfter the capacity simulation is complete, you can submit capacity simulation results to NEs. Therefore, the coverage prediction can use more accurate cell transmit power, load, and interference to make the prediction results more accurate.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 268 of 474

Page 289: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Submitting the Average Result of Multiple Snapshots to NEs

Figure 3-1 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (1)

Figure 3-2 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (2)

Click Commit Result. The information about each cell, such as the actual transmit power, load and IOT, is submitted to NEs. After the information is successfully submitted to NEs, the following dialog box is displayed:

Figure 3-3 Submitting the average result of multiple snapshots to NEs (3)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 269 of 474

Page 290: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Submitting the Result of a Single Snapshot to NEs

Figure 3-1 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (1)

Figure 3-2 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (2)

Click Commit Result. The information about each cell, such as the actual transmit power, load and IOT, is submitted to NEs. After the information is successfully submitted to NEs, the following dialog box is displayed:

Figure 3-3 Submitting the result a single snapshot to NEs (3)

The current result will be displayed by the latest submitting result.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 270 of 474

Page 291: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.7.6 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results

Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches

The exported files contain the statistics information, average value of sites, and average value of cells at the monte carlo level and the statistics information, site studies, cell studies, and user studies at the snapshot level. The interface format is the same as that as described in section "Viewing Capacity Simulation Results."

Figure 3-1 Exporting simulation results in batches (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 271 of 474

Page 292: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Exporting simulation results in batches (2)

Click Export.

Figure 3-3 Exporting simulation results in batches (3)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 272 of 474

Page 293: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

You can see the progress on the lower part of the U-Net. After the progress reaches 100%, the following dialog box is displayed.

Figure 3-4 Exporting simulation results in batches (4)

Figure 3-5 shows the statistics tab pages at the monte carlo level, such as Statistic, Site, and Cell; the statistics tab pages at the snapshot level, such as Snapshot0Statistic, Snapshot0_Site, Snapshot0_Cell, and Snapshot0_Mobile.

Figure 3-5 Exporting simulation results in batches (5)

Exporting Results of a Single Statistics Tab Page of a Simulation Group

You can separately export results in the statistics tab pages of Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) for statistics results of multiple snapshots in a simulation group and results in the statistics tab pages of Sites, Cells, and Mobiles for statistics results of a single snapshot in a simulation group. The following contents take the Site(Average) tab page as an example and describe the method to export the statistics results.

The exported results can be saved in a TXT, CSV, or XLS file.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 273 of 474

Page 294: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (1)

Figure 3-2 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (2)

Choose Action > Display Column.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 274 of 474

Page 295: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (3)

The Column Display dialog box provides three options, All, None, and Close.

For example, you can select only Site in the Column Display dialog box and click Close. The Group Result dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (4)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 275 of 474

Page 296: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

In the displayed Group Result box, only the Site column is displayed. Then, click Action, and choose Export from the shortcut menu.

Figure 3-5 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (5)

Figure 3-6 Exporting a single statistics result of the simulation (6)

In the displayed Data Export dialog box, only Site is included in the Export Fields area. Then, you can click Export to export the site information.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 276 of 474

Page 297: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.8 ASPSite planning is the first step in a network planning during network construction. Currently, most telecom operators in the world have deployed GSM and UMTS networks. As the network technology gradually evolves into WiMAX, TD-SCDMA, and LTE, telecom operators focus more on using existing base station resources, reducing costs in network construction, and improving network construction efficiency.

Telecom operators now cooperate with each other because certain operators have insufficient spectrum resources. New requirements emerge during this period in terms of 2G refarming to 3G, 2G network combining, and spectrum resource sharing. In these scenarios, whether the sites in the reconstructed networks can provide continuous coverage and absorb traffic is also a major concern for telecom operators. The U-Net, a professional radio network planning platform provided by Huawei, helps with site planning in network deployment, expansion, and combination scenarios. The U-Net also assists pre- and post-sales network planning personnel in making and verifying site planning solutions.

3.8.1 ASP Application ScenariosThe U-Net provides the Accurate Site Planning (ASP) function. This function enables the U-Net to select optimum sites for deployment from user-specified sites based on network coverage and traffic objectives. If no candidate sites are available, the U-Net provides advice about a new site location and site configurations, and users determine whether to create the site. This function determines new sites for LTE network construction (including network combination) and live networks.

The following table describes function support degree in different scenarios.

Scenario Scenario Description

Site Selection

Site Addition

Using Existing MR Data

Resolving Capacity Problem

Resolving Capacity Problem

Network deployment

After operators propose coverage and traffic objectives, the U-Net automatically provides recommended site locations and configurations.

√ √ √ √ √

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 277 of 474

Page 298: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Scenario Scenario Description

Site Selection

Site Addition

Using Existing MR Data

Resolving Capacity Problem

Resolving Capacity Problem

Network expansion

Based on the problematic coverage areas and overloaded areas, the U-Net automatically provides recommended site locations and configurations.

√ √ √ √ √

Network combination

Based on the coverage and traffic analysis before network combination, the U-Net automatically provides information about the sites to be reserved and the recommended configurations.

√ √ √ √ √

Refarming Based on the coverage and capacity analysis for GSM, UMTS, and LTE networks, the U-Net automatically provides LTE site locations and configurations appropriate to refarming.

√ √ √ √ √

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 278 of 474

Page 299: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.8.2 Preparations for the PlanningBefore performing ASP, you need to prepare data listed in this section. After data preparation is complete, the U-Net sequentially sorts such data in corresponding modules in LTE planning projects.

Electronic Map

Electronic map data is fundamental to ASP in the U-Net. Based on electronic maps, the U-Net determines signal strength to calculate cells' signal coverage range and traffic volumes to be absorbed.

The U-Net supports electronic maps in Planet, *.TAB, and *.mif formats. The U-Net supports the following layers in ASP: clutter map (mandatory), altitude map (mandatory), vector map (optional), and building height map (mandatory if the Vocanno propagation model is used). For details about how to import electronic maps in the U-Net, see section Error: Reference source not found"Error: Reference source not found."

Engineering Information

Engineering parameters include information, such as the locations, types, frequencies, frequency bands, and cell parameters of all existing and candidate sites, and therefore are the basic data for ASP. Before executing LTE ASP, ensure that all engineering parameters for candidate sites are imported to the U-Net.

The U-Net supports the import of engineering parameters in TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX formats.

The engineering parameters contain the following information:

Site information: such as the site name and location (latitude and longitude)

Antenna information: such as the antenna azimuth, downtilt, type, and height

Cell information: such as the cell name, frequency band, RNC ID, and CI

The following attachments are engineering parameter templates for FDD LTE and TDD LTE.

LTE Site Planning EngineeringParametersLTE-FDD.xlsx

LTE Site Planning EngineeringParametersLTE-TDD.xlsx

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 279 of 474

Page 300: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

For details about how to import engineering parameters in the U-Net, see section Error: Reference source not found"Error: Reference source not found."

MR Data

MR data is reported by the UE to the BSC/RNC during network operation. You can enable MR data collection function on the BSC/RNC to obtain MR data reported by all UEs at a specified period. Then, the Nastar locates and analyzes MR data and converts it into the MR data that can be used for ASP in the U-Net. With the MR data, the U-Net calibrates signal coverage for cells on the live network to obtain more accurate coverage. The MR data also helps analyze statistical information about cell traffic to provide traffic volumes on each grid. Such information helps users analyze traffic volume that each site and cell absorbs after ASP.

MR data is not required in certain scenarios: In network expansion scenarios, the MR data of other vendors is unavailable; telecom operators do not require high site planning accuracy; MR data cannot be collected in a project; and MR data is unavailable because new networks are under construction. In these scenarios, the U-Net uses propagation models to predict the coverage of existing and new cells.

The U-Net supports the import of MR data in TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX formats. The MR data exported from the Nastar is generally in CSV format. The following table describes LTE MR data.

Parameter Meaning Type Value Range

TAC TAC information of a cell, which is mandatory in MR data.

Text N/A

CI CI information of a cell, which is mandatory in MR data.

Text N/A

Longitude Longitude information in MR data. Floating point number

N/A

Latitude Latitude information in MR data. Floating point number

N/A

MRCount Number of MRs reported by a cell within a specified period.

Integer N/A

RSCP Average measurement level that a cell receives within a specified period.

Floating point number

N/A

RSRQ Signal RSRQ in the MR data that a cell receives within a specified period.

Floating point number

N/A

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 280 of 474

Page 301: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Grid Traffic Map

Data on the grid traffic map includes CS and PS traffic volumes on each clutter grid. Based on clutter weights or MR data, the U-Net rasterizes busy-hour cell traffic volumes obtained from the live network and then obtains data for the grid traffic map. Data on a grid traffic map represents traffic volumes on the entire network during ASP. The traffic will be absorbed by existing and new cells on the network.

The U-Net provides two methods of creating a grid traffic map:

1、Rasterizing clutter weights. In network deployment or when MR data is unavailable, you can create a grid traffic map by rasterizing clutter weights.

2、Rasterizing MR data. In existing networks or when MR data is available, you can create a grid traffic map by rasterizing MR data.

A grid traffic map is not required if the expected cell traffic volume is unavailable or when the traffic absorption for the entire network is not taken into consideration.

3.8.3 Creating an ASP GroupAfter planning preparations are made, you can create an ASP group to implement automatic site planning. To create an ASP group, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click the Operation icon under Project Explorer in the U-Net main window. Right-click LTE under ASP and choose New from the shortcut menu.

Figure 3-1 Creating an ASP group (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 281 of 474

Page 302: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Step 2 Set mandatory parameters in the displayed dialog box and click OK.

Figure 3-1 Creating an ASP group (2)

3.8.4 Setting ASP ParametersRight-click an LTE site planning project in the ASP navigation tree and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The parameter setting dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box contains the General, Objective, Strategy, and Advanced tab pages, allowing users to set parameters required for ASP.

General Tab Page

For details about the General tab page, see 3.8.3 I. Step 2Figure 3-1.

The General tab page contains the computation area and basic data for setting ASP. Computation areas and frequency bands specify the range for a site to be planned. Basic data includes traffic map data, MR data, DT data, and coverage complaint data, helping you obtain more accurate ASP results.

Table 3-1 lists the parameters on the General tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the General tab page

Parameter Description

Name Name of an ASP group.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 282 of 474

Page 303: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

After an ASP group is created, you can view its name under the ASP > LTE node on the Operation page. The U-Net provides a default name for each new ASP group.

Computation area A polygon drew by users in the U-Net. A larger computation area requires longer computation time. Therefore, it is recommended that the computation area be set to a range within 20,000 square kilometers. When Computation area is set to Full Map, the U-Net calculates all activated site, which may lead to a computation failure due to oversized range.

Resolution (m): Precision for calculating an ASP group.

The default value is 50.

Frequency Band Settings You can set the following parameters in the Frequency Band Settings area: Frequency Band: available frequency bands Enable: whether the frequency bands are enabled Number of Sites: number of sites using a frequency

band Number of Carriers: number of all carriers under a

frequency band

Data Source Data source used for site planning.

Traffic map Whether traffic map data is used.

If you select this check box, you can select a traffic map from the drop-down list box. The U-Net analyzes the traffic weight in each grid, evaluates the traffic volume for each cell, and determines whether some cells are overloaded using the selected grid-based traffic map data during ASP.

Measurement report data Whether MR data is used.

If you select this check box, you can select MR data from the drop-down list box. MR data is used to calibrate link loss data.

Drive test data Whether DT data is used.

If you select this check box, you can select DT data from the drop-down list box. DT data is used to calibrate link loss data.

MR/DT Conversion Rules for converting MR and DT data.

The U-Net allows users to set rules for converting MR and DT data of different frequency bands. When users have MR and DT data of live GSM and UMTS networks, users can set inter-RAT and inter-frequency-band conversion rules so that the U-Net converts such data into MR and DT data used for LTE ASP. With the converted data, the

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 283 of 474

Page 304: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

U-Net provides users with network coverage information. When you click MR/DT Conversion, the dialog box shown in Figure 3-2 is displayed. For details about the parameters in this dialog box, see Table 3-1.

User complaint data Whether user complaint data is used.

If you select this check box, you can click Browse to import user complaint data in TXT, CSV, XLS, or XLSX format. You can also click Get Template to obtain a user complaint data template in Excel format.

VIP user data Whether VIP user data is used.

If you select this check box, you can click Browse to import VIP user data in TXT, CSV, XLS, or XLSX format. You can also click Get Template to obtain a VIP user data template in Excel format.

Set Prediction Parameters Coverage prediction parameters.

When you click Set Prediction Parameters, the dialog box shown in Figure 3-3 is displayed, allowing you to set parameters used for coverage prediction in ASP.

Figure 3-2 Frequency Band Convert Setting dialog box

Table 3-1 lists the parameters in the Frequency Band Convert Setting dialog box.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 284 of 474

Page 305: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Frequency Band Convert Setting dialog box

Parameter Description

Polygon Range that a conversion rule applies

Source Layer Source layer for a conversion rule

Target Layer Target layer for a conversion rule

Offset(dB) Offset for a conversion rule

Currently, the MR and DT data conversion rules are recommended for high frequency bands. This is because the calculation results for MR and DT data conversion are not accurate for low frequency bands.

Figure 3-3 Prediction Parameters dialog box

Table 3-1 lists the parameters in the Prediction Parameters dialog box.

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Prediction Parameters dialog box

Parameter Description

Minimum RSRP (dBm) Minimum valid level for coverage prediction.

A signal level lower than the value of this parameter is regarded as invalid and will be discarded.

With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 285 of 474

Page 306: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

After this parameter is selected and Cell edge coverage probability is set, the U-Net automatically calculates the shadow fading margin and preserves the obtained shadow fading margin in the signal propagation loss to reduce the impact of shadow fading on signal levels.

Cell edge coverage probability (%):

Probability of cell edge coverage.

A greater cell edge coverage probability indicates a greater shadow fading margin and a smaller cell coverage. The shadow fading margin is 0 when the cell edge coverage percentage is 50%. You are advised to set this value to 75.0.

Terminal Terminal type selected by a user.

Service Service type selected by a user.

Mobility Mobility type selected by a user.

Indoor coverage Whether indoor coverage is considered.

When this parameter is selected, the U-Net preserves the penetration loss specified for each clutter type in the corresponding signal propagation loss anywhere when the transceiver is deployed indoors.

Interference Reception Threshold (dBm)

Threshold for minimum interference receive level.

Neighbour PDSCH Load (%) The percentage of PDSCH load for a neighboring cell.

When this check box is selected, the U-Net considers the load of neighboring cells while calculating SINR.

Calculate now Whether ASP is executed immediately after you click OK.

Objective Tab Page

On the Objective tab page, you can set a coverage objective for ASP, whether to solve coverage and capacity problems, define weak-coverage grids, and set capacity expansion parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 286 of 474

Page 307: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Objective tab page

Table 3-1 lists the parameters on the Objective tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Objective tab page

Parameter Description

Resolve poor coverage Whether to resolve weak-coverage problems.

If this parameter is selected, you can select and add sites based on coverage.

RSRP threshold (dBm) Threshold for downlink signal level.

Signal level lower than the threshold is regarded as weak coverage.

Target coverage ratio (%) Target coverage percentage.

The default value is 100.

Focus areas A focused area.

All areas calculated during ASP are regarded as focused areas, excluding certain intersecting areas. You can differentiate focused areas by setting different coverage level thresholds and coverage objective percentages.

Polygon Name of the polygon specifying a focused area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 287 of 474

Page 308: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Used Whether a target coverage percentage is set and used for optimizing a focused area.

RSRP Threshold(dBm) Minimum coverage signal level threshold within a focused area.

An area whose signal level is higher than the threshold is not regarded as a weak coverage area.

Target Coverage (%) Percentage of the area whose signal level reaches the specified signal level threshold in the focused area.

The target coverage is achieved only when the coverage percentage in the focused area reaches the value of this parameter.

Resolve capacity overload Whether to resolve capacity overload.

If this parameter is selected, you can select and add sites based on capacity during site planning. This does not apply to LTE networks.

Expansion Settings Setting of the expansion parameter.

Frequency Band Frequency band to which the cell to be expanded belongs.

Expansion Whether to perform expansion.

Max Carrier Number per Sector

Maximum number of carriers allowed to be expanded in a sector.

Resolve low service rate coverage

Whether to calculate user experience rate.

When this check box is selected, the Service Rate Settings area take effect, and the rate of each site can be displayed on the GIS map after ASP.

Low service rate threshold Threshold for a low service rate.

Strategy Tab Page

You can set site addition modes on the Strategy tab page, including specifying the maximum number of sites, whether macro and micro sites are allowed, macro and micro site templates, and candidate sites.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 288 of 474

Page 309: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Strategy tab page

Table 3-1 lists the parameters on the Objective tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Objective tab page

Parameter Description

Max site number Maximum number of sites.

The ASP is stopped when the number of active and new sites exceeds the value of this parameter.

Allow macro site addition Whether macro sites can be added and whether a macro site template can be selected.

After you select this check box, the U-Net uses a template to create a macro site to predict coverage and determine traffic absorption. For details, see section 2.4.11 Site Template Configuration.

Allow micro site addition Whether micro sites can be added and whether a micro site template can be selected.

After you select this check box, the U-Net uses a template to create a micro site, which absorbs all traffic within the coverage radius of 150 m. For details, see section 2.4.11 Site Template Configuration.

Allow Site Selection Whether sites can be selected from candidate sites.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 289 of 474

Page 310: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

After you select this check box, you can click Import site status to import the Locked or Excluded status information about all candidate sites.

Candidate Site Existing LTE site in the U-Net, which can serve as candidate sites.

For details about the parameters in this area, see Table 3-1.

Figure 3-2 Site Value Items Setting dialog box

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 290 of 474

Page 311: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Clutter Constraint dialog box

Table 3-1 lists the parameters in the Candidate Sites area.

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Candidate Sites area

Parameter

Description Default Value

Value Range

Site Name Name of a site.

A site is displayed only when the site is available in the engineering parameters and Used is set to True in the Setting table.

N/A This parameter cannot be modified.

Frequency Band

Frequency band information about a site.

If a site includes cells of different frequency bands, all the frequency band names are displayed.

N/A This parameter cannot be modified.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 291 of 474

Page 312: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter

Description Default Value

Value Range

Original Status

Original status of a site, which means whether the site is an existing or candidate site.

This parameter takes effect when Allow Site Selection is selected.

N/A N/A

Locked Whether a site is locked.

If a site is locked, it will be used as an existing site on the network during the site planning.

The status of all sites in the Active state is set to Locked by default.

True/False

Excluded Whether a site is excluded.

If a site is excluded, it will not be used for site planning.

False True/False

Site Type Type of a site: macro or micro site.

N/A This parameter cannot be modified.

Site Priority Site priority.

This parameter can be set after Enable in the Site Value Items Setting dialog box is selected.

By default, this option is selected.

0-100

Site Cost Score of the site cost.

This parameter can be set after Enable in the Site Value Items Setting dialog box is selected.

By default, this option is selected.

0-100

User Define 1 Score of user-defined dimension 1.

This parameter can be set after Enable in the Site Value Items Setting dialog box is selected.

By default, this option is cleared.

0-100

User Define 2 Score of user-defined dimension 2.

This parameter can be set after Enable in the Site Value Items Setting dialog box is selected.

By default, this option is cleared.

0-100

User Define 3 Score of user-defined dimension 3.

This parameter can be set after Enable in the Site Value Items Setting dialog box is selected.

By default, this option is cleared.

0-100

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 292 of 474

Page 313: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter

Description Default Value

Value Range

Comments Site comments. N/A This parameter cannot be modified.

You can filter sites to be locked according to Site Type and Comments of candidate cells. Then, you can edit Locked or Excluded status information about the sites. Site Type and Comments indicate the site type and comments of sites in imported engineering parameters. In ASP for network deployment and combination, it is recommended that you use the existing sites of operators as candidate sites. In existing network scenarios, you must set Locked status information of existing networks to True, which means that you select sites for network expansion based on the sites on the existing network.

Advanced Tab Page

Figure 3-1 Advanced tab page

Table 3-1 lists the parameters on the Advanced tab page.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 293 of 474

Page 314: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Advanced tab page

Parameter Description

Signal level gap of active set(db)

Threshold for offloading traffic.

When there are multiple cells in a site, this parameter specifies the level difference between the cell and primary serving cell, within which the cell offloads traffic. This parameter is set to 4 db by default.

Revenue of CS per erlang Revenue of CS traffic per erlang.

This parameter calculates CS revenues of each site, which affects site selection priority.

Revenue of PS per Kbytes Revenue of PS traffic per KBytes.

This parameter calculates PS revenues of each site, which affects site selection priority.

Customized weight Whether to customize weights.

Max antenna downtilt Maximum antenna downtilt angle of a new site.

Max antenna height (m) Maximum antenna height of a new site.

Max split width(m) Maximum width for dividing areas for adding sites based on coverage.

Minimum azimuth interval Minimum included angle for the azimuth of a new site.

Minimum ISD of macro site(m)

Minimum distance between macro sites.

The U-Net stops adding macro sites for improving the weak coverage in an area if the side length of the area is smaller than the value of this parameter.

Minimum ISD of micro site(m)

Minimum distance between micro sites.

No micro base stations are allowed to be added to a grid when other base stations are available within the specified distance to the grid.

RSRP threshold for micro sites(dBm)

Signal level threshold for adding a micro site.

No micro sites are allowed to be added to a grid when the signal level in the grid exceeds the value of this parameter.

3.8.5 Executing ASPAfter an ASP group is created, the group is displayed in the corresponding project navigation tree, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 294 of 474

Page 315: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 New ASP group in the project navigation tree

To execute ASP, right-click the new ASP group and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Choosing Calculate

The U-Net then displays the calculation progress, as shown in Figure 3-3.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 295 of 474

Page 316: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Calculation progress

After the calculation is complete, the U-Net prints information about site planning in the Event Viewer dialog box, as shown in .

Figure 3-4 Event Viewer dialog box

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 296 of 474

Page 317: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.8.6 Stopping ASPTo stop a running ASP, right-click the ASP group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Stopping ASP

After ASP is stopped, the related logs are displayed in the Event Viewer dialog box, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Logs in the Event Viewer dialog box

After ASP is stopped, the U-Net does not provide calculation results of this time. However, the calculation results of the last time are not deleted.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 297 of 474

Page 318: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.8.7 Viewing ASP ResultsAfter ASP is complete, the ASP results are displayed in the U-Net, as shown in . If the result table is closed, you can right-click the planning task and choose Open Result from the shortcut menu to view the results.

Figure 3-1 Viewing ASP results

Error: Reference source not found shows the ASP results.

Figure 3-2 ASP results

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 298 of 474

Page 319: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Statistic Tab Page

The Statistic tab page displays statistics about the coverage objectives, capacity objectives, number of added sites, and number of selected sites on the entire network. You can click Export to export all site planning statistics to an Excel file.

Table 3-1 lists the parameters on the Statistic tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Statistic tab page

Parameter Description

Duration Duration for ASP, which is displayed in the format of hh:mm:ss. You can obtain the overall time information about ASP.

Coverage Statistic Coverage statistics.

The Coverage Statistic area displays the coverage information about each area based on coverage counters. Coverage counters include coverage objective, original coverage status, and final coverage status.

For details about these counters, see Table 3-1.

Capacity Statistic Capacity statistics.

The U-Net calculates the traffic volume absorbed by each site when a traffic map is selected during ASP, and collects statistics about the traffic volume absorbed by each site after ASP.

For details about these counters, see Table 3-1.

Site Number Statistic Number of sites.

The Site Number Statistic area displays the number of macro sites, number of micro sites, number of cells, and number of carriers before and after the ASP. This helps learn the overall ASP results.

For details about these counters, see Table 3-1.

Figure 3-3 shows the Coverage Statistic area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 299 of 474

Page 320: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Coverage Statistic area

describes counters in the Coverage Statistic area.

Table 3-1 Counters in the Coverage Statistic area

Parameter Description

RSRP Threshold(dBm) Weakest signal level.

Grids where levels are lower than this threshold are regarded as low-coverage grids.

Target coverage ratio(%) Target coverage percentage.

You can set different target coverage percentage for different areas.

Original coverage(%) Initial coverage percentage.

If candidate sites can be selected, Original coverage (%) indicates the coverage percentage of all sites for which Locked is selected. If sites cannot be selected, Original coverage (%) indicates the coverage percentage of all sites whose status is Active.

Final coverage(%) Final coverage percentage.

If candidate sites can be selected, Final coverage (%) indicates the coverage percentage of sites for which Locked is selected, selected sites, and new macro and micro sites after the ASP. If candidate sites cannot be selected, Final coverage (%) indicates the coverage percentage of sites whose status is Active and new macro and micro sites after the ASP.

Improvement(%) Improvement percentage.

This parameter indicates coverage improvement percentage of each area after the ASP.

Improvement area(km2) Improvement area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 300 of 474

Page 321: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

This parameter indicates the coverage improvement area of each area after the ASP, with the unit of square kilometers.

Result Whether the ASP results achieve the coverage objective.

Success means that the coverage objective is achieved. Failed means that the coverage objective is not achieved.

Figure 3-4 shows the Capacity Statistic area.

Figure 3-4 Capacity Statistic area

Table 3-1 describes counters in the Capacity Statistic area.

Table 3-1 Counters in the Capacity Statistic area

Parameter Description

Total PS traffic volume(KBytes)

PS traffic volume on a selected traffic map, in the unit of KBytes.

Original PS traffic volume(KBytes):

Volume of PS traffic absorbed by existing sites before ASP.

Original traffic volume(%) Percentage of the volume of traffic absorbed by existing sites before ASP to the total traffic volume on a traffic map.

Final PS traffic volume(KBytes)

Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all selected and new sites after ASP.

Final traffic volume(%) Percentage of the volume of traffic absorbed by selected and new sites after ASP to the total traffic volume on a traffic map.

Improvement(%) Improvement proportion of the volume of traffic that can be absorbed by sites on the live network after the ASP.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 301 of 474

Page 322: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 shows the Site Number Statistic area.

Figure 3-5 Site Number Statistic area

Table 3-1 describes counters in the Site Number Statistic area.

Table 3-1 Counters in the Site Number Statistic area

Parameter Description

Original number Number of sites, cells, and carriers in each area before the ASP.

Added macro number Number of macro sites, cells, and carriers selected or created during the ASP.

Added micro number Number of micro sites, cells, and carriers selected or created during the ASP.

Final number Number of sites, cells, and carriers in each area after the ASP.

Site Tab Page

The Site tab page displays comparison results of coverage, traffic volume, and TRX configurations of each site (including candidate and new sites) before and after the ASP. This tab page also displays the frequency band and type of each site, and reason why the site is displayed in the ASP results. Information on this tab page helps users analyze ASP results by site.

By clicking a row title on the Site tab page, you can quickly locate the site on the map, check the actual geographic location and surrounding environment of the site, and analyze the relationship between this site and adjacent sites.

By right-clicking any area on the Site tab page and choosing the related item from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to display. By clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the column.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 302 of 474

Page 323: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-6 Shortcut menu

Figure 3-7 Site tab page

The Site tab page contains statistics on added sites and selected sites. Table 3-1 describes parameters on the Site tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Site tab page

Parameter Name Description

Site Name Name of a site.

Longitude Longitude of a site.

Latitude Latitude of a site.

Frequency Band Frequency bands for all sectors at a site. If sectors at a site belong to multiple frequency bands, names of multiple frequency bands will be displayed in this column, for example, 2110 FDD - 1.4 MHz; 2110 FDD - 10 MHz.

Original Status Original status of a site. This parameter indicates whether the site is an existing site or a candidate site.

Final Status Final status of a site. Values: Excluded by user, Unselected, No change, Locked by user, Expansion, Selected by coverage, Selected by capacity, Selected by

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 303 of 474

Page 324: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Name Description

service rate, Added by coverage, Added by capacity, and Added by service rate

SiteType Type of a site. Macro: indicates a macro site. Micro: indicates a micro site.

Original Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all sectors at a site before the ASP (unit: square kilometer). If a site is unavailable on the live network before the ASP, or Locked for the site is not selected, the site does not have coverage area.

Final Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all sectors at a site after the ASP (unit: square kilometer). After the ASP, the U-Net will analyze the coverage of all existing sites on the live network, locked sites, selected sites, and new sites and display their coverage area.

Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Percentage of the weak coverage area to the total coverage area of a site after site planning. A larger value indicates weaker site coverage. In this case, you need to optimize site parameters or add sites.

Original PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all sectors at a site before the ASP.

Final PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all sectors at a site after the ASP.

Transceiver Tab Page

The Transceiver tab page displays comparison results of coverage, traffic volume, and TRX configurations of each transceiver before and after the ASP. This tab page also displays the frequency band and type of each transceiver, and reason why the transceiver is displayed in the ASP results. Information on this tab page helps users analyze ASP results by sector.

By clicking a row title on the Transceiver tab page, you can quickly locate the sector on the map, check the actual geographic location and surrounding environment of the transceiver, and analyze the relationship between this transceiver and surrounding transceivers.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 304 of 474

Page 325: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

By right-clicking any area on the Transceiver tab page and choosing the related item from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to display. By clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the column.

Figure 3-8 Shortcut menu

Figure 3-9 Transceiver tab page

Table 3-1 describes parameters on the Transceiver tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Transceiver tab page

Parameter Name Description

Site Name Name of the site to which a transceiver belongs.

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of a cell under a transceiver. If a transceiver contains multiple cells, names of multiple cells will be displayed in this column.

Frequency Band Frequency band to which a cell belongs under a transceiver. If the cell under a transceiver belongs to multiple frequency bands, names of all frequency bands will be displayed in this column.

Original Status Original status of a site. This parameter indicates whether the site is an existing site or a candidate

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 305 of 474

Page 326: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Name Description

site.

Final Status Final status of a site. Values: Excluded by user, Unselected, No change, Locked by user, Expansion, Selected by coverage, Selected by capacity, Selected by service rate, Added by coverage, Added by capacity, and Added by service rate

Original Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all cells under a transceiver before the ASP (unit: square kilometer). If a transceiver has not been activated before the ASP, the transceiver does not have coverage area.

Final Coverage Area(km2) Size of the area covered by all cells under a transceiver after the ASP (unit: square kilometer). After the ASP, the U-Net will analyze the coverage of all existing sites on the live network, locked sites, selected sites, and new sites under a transceiver and display their coverage area.

Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Percentage of the weak coverage area to the total coverage area of a site after the ASP. A larger value indicates weaker site coverage. In this case, you need to optimize site parameters or add sites.

Original PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all sectors at a site before the ASP.

Final PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) Volume of PS traffic absorbed by all sectors at a site after the ASP.

Antenna Type Type of an antenna.

Azimuth Azimuth of an antenna.

Height Height of an antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt of an antenna.

Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt of an antenna.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 306 of 474

Page 327: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Traffic Absorption Tab Page

The Traffic Absorption tab page displays cell traffic absorption relationships. The area in the left pane of the Traffic Absorption tab page displays all active transceivers and the reasons why they are displayed in the planning results after the ASP. The table in the right pane displays the site and sector traffic absorbed by the selected transceiver before the ASP.

Figure 3-10 Traffic Absorption tab page

Table 3-1 describes parameters on the Traffic Absorption tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Traffic Absorption tab page

Parameter Name Description

Related Cell Name of a related cell. This list displays all cells that have traffic absorption relationships with the cells selected in the left pane.

Original Status Original status of a site. This parameter indicates whether the site is an existing site or a candidate site.

Final Status Final status of a site. Values: Excluded by user, Unselected, No change, Locked by user, Expansion, Selected by coverage, Selected by capacity, Selected by service rate, Added by coverage, Added by capacity, and Added by service rate

PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) PS traffic volume. Volume of PS traffic of the selected cell in the left pane, which is absorbed by the cell in the same row in the right pane.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 307 of 474

Page 328: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Changes Tab Page

The Changes tab page displays the names and scores of all selected and new sites during the ASP. You can change the weight of each dimension to update site scores and sort the scores. Then, you can determine which sites to be used in the ASP results.

By right-clicking any area on the Changes tab page and choosing the related item from the shortcut menu, you can select columns you want to display. By clicking a column header, you can freeze, hide, or unfreeze the column.

Figure 3-11 Shortcut menu

Figure 3-12 Changes tab page

Table 3-1 describes parameters on the Changes tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Changes tab page

Parameter Name Description

Site Name Name of a site.

Site Type Type of a site. Macro: indicates a macro site. Micro: indicates a micro site.

Cause Reason why a site is displayed in the planning results. The meaning of this parameter is the same as the Reason parameter on the Site tab page.

Coverage Score Coverage score of a site. The

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 308 of 474

Page 329: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Name Description

coverage score of a site is calculated based on the percentage of the coverage area of the site to the maximum coverage area of all sites. The centesimal system is used to score. Assume that the maximum coverage area of all sites is Cmax and the coverage area of a current site is Ccurr. The formula specified in the default score rule is as follows: Rcurr = Ccurr/Cmax x 100.

Traffic Score Traffic score of a site. The traffic score of a site is calculated based on the percentage of the volume of traffic absorbed by the site to the maximum traffic volume of all sites. The method of calculating the traffic score is the same as that of calculating the coverage score. A larger score indicates a higher priority.

Service Rate Score Score for service rate. The service rate score simulates the user experience rate by site. A larger score indicates a higher rate on the site.

Total Score The total score is calculated based on the score and weight of each dimension. A higher total score indicates a higher site priority. A site with a high priority is recommended.

Enable Whether to enable a site. If this parameter is selected, the site status in the engineering parameters of the U-Net is updated when the ASP results are submitted. If this parameter is not selected, the site status is not submitted.

Clutter Tab Page

The Clutter tab page displays the final statistical results of each clutter type. You can check the statistical counters of each clutter type in the entire calculation area, including the clutter area, weak coverage proportion, total traffic volume, and volume of absorbed traffic.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 309 of 474

Page 330: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-13 Clutter tab page

Table 3-1 describes parameters on the Clutter tab page.

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Clutter tab page

Parameter Name Description

Coverage Area(km2) Coverage area of a clutter in the entire calculation area.

Poor Coverage Ratio(%) Ratio of the weak coverage area to the total coverage area of a clutter in the entire calculation area.

PS Traffic Volume(KBytes) PS traffic volume of a clutter in the entire calculation area (unit: Kbytes).

Absorbed Traffic Volume(Erlang) Volume of absorbed traffic of a clutter in the entire calculation area (unit: Erlang).

Setting the Score and Weight of Each Dimension

You can set the score and weight of each dimension to affect the total score of a site. On the Changes tab page, click Score Setting. The Score Setting dialog box is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 310 of 474

Page 331: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Score Setting dialog box

If you do not select Use corresponding to an item, the item is not considered when the U-Net calculates the score of the site.

After you set the weight of each dimension, click OK. Then, the U-Net will recalculate the total scores and priorities of all sites on the Changes tab page.

Remarks: You can filter and sort results displayed in all tables. When sorting results, you can double-click the table header. When filtering results, you can click a triangle symbol in the table header. Then, the filter items are displayed and you can select items you want to filter, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Filter items

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 311 of 474

Page 332: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.8.8 Displaying ASP Results on the Map

Checking ASP Results Represented both in a Table and on a Map

The U-Net can display ASP results on the map. Before using the geographical display function, you must select Show Planning Result, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Show Planning Result menu

On the Site or Transceiver tab page, click the row header. The site or transceiver is displayed in blue in the middle of the map window.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 312 of 474

Page 333: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Window in which the table and map of the site are associated

Figure 3-3 Window in which the table and map of the transceiver are associated

The map window corresponding to the Traffic Absorption tab page displays the selected transceiver and other transceivers that have traffic absorption relationships with the transceiver in different colors. In addition, the map window uses lines and arrows to indicate traffic absorption directions.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 313 of 474

Page 334: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Geographical display of traffic absorption

Setting Parameters for Geographical Display

Right-click LTE Site Planning 1 and choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Setting dialog box is displayed.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 314 of 474

Page 335: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Display Setting menu

The Display Setting dialog box contains three tab pages: Symbols, Traffic Relation, and Cell Coverage. On the Symbols tab page, you can set styles and colors of new sites. On the Traffic Relation tab page, you can set colors for cells that have traffic absorption relationships. On the Cell Coverage tab page, you can set the coverage scope and level of each cell.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 315 of 474

Page 336: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Symbols tab page

In the New Site Style area of the Symbols tab page, you can set the display styles for new macro and micro sites, including the size and symbol. In the Transceiver Color area, you can set different colors for transceivers with different reasons.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 316 of 474

Page 337: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Traffic Relation tab page

Display cell traffic absorption: indicates whether to display cell traffic absorption relationships. If you select it, all cells that have traffic absorption relationships with the cell in the left pane of the table and all lines are displayed on the GIS map in the selected color.

The color of related cell: sets colors for cells that have traffic absorption relationships. The default color is green.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 317 of 474

Page 338: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-4 Cell Coverage tab page

Display the cell coverage area: indicates whether to display cell coverage areas. You can set the legends for the coverage range display in the table of the Cell Coverage tab page. If you select Display the cell coverage area, the coverage range of the cell selected in the left pane of the Traffic Absorption tab page will be displayed on the GIS map.

Comparing and Analyzing Coverage Counters

You can right-click LTE Site Planning 1 and choose Coverage Map from the shortcut menu. The Study Types dialog box with layer items are displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 318 of 474

Page 339: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Coverage Map menu

Figure 3-2 Study Types dialog box

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 319 of 474

Page 340: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 describes parameters in the Study Types dialog box.

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Study Types dialog box

Parameter Name Description

Original RSRP Downlink RSRP coverage layer on the entire network before the ASP.

Final RSRP Downlink RSRP coverage layer on the entire network after the ASP.

RSRP Gain Gain layer after the downlink RSRP coverage planning on the entire network.

Original SINR Downlink SINR coverage layer on the entire network before the ASP.

Final SINR Downlink SINR coverage layer on the entire network after the ASP.

SINR Gain Gain layer after the downlink SINR coverage planning on the entire network.

Original Service Rate Average service rate of each user before the ASP.

Final Service Rate Average service rate of each user after the ASP.

Service Rate Variation Gain after the service rate of each user is planned.

Original Best Server Distribution of best serving cells on the entire network before the ASP.

Final Best Server Distribution of best serving cells on the entire network after the ASP.

Best Server Variation Change in distribution of best serving cells on the entire network before and after the ASP.

In the Study Types dialog box, select layers you want to display and click OK. Then, the selected layers are displayed in the corresponding ASP groups and on the GIS map, as shown in Figure 3-3. You can deselect a layer in the Study Types dialog box if you do not want to display it on the GIS map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 320 of 474

Page 341: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Coverage layers on the GIS map

3.9 ACPThe U-Net provides the automatic cell planning (ACP) function. This function is used to automatically plan cell parameters (including power, antenna azimuth, mechanical downtilt, electrical downtilt, and height) based on initial cell status as well as user-specified areas and allowed cell adjustment range. This function determines cell parameters for network deployment (including network combination) and live networks.

3.9.1 ACP Parameter PreparationsSetting ACP parameters to be imported into parameter templates

Step 1 Set site parameters.

For details about how to set site parameters, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-1.

Step 2 Set transceiver parameters.

For details about how to set transceiver parameters, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 321 of 474

Page 342: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Step 3 Set LTE-FDD cell parameters.

Table 3-1 LTE-FDD cell parameters

Parameter Description

*Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver, which uniquely identifies a transceiver.

*Cell Name Name of a carrier.

*Active Whether to activate the current carrier.

*Frequency Band Frequency band information.

*Channel Index Channel index.

*Max Power(dBm) Maximum transmit power.

*RS Power(dBm) Power of a reference signal on a subcarrier. Unit: dBm.

*PDSCH Actual Load(DL) Actual downlink load.

The value range is [0,1].

*Scene Scenario in which a cell is deployed.

* indicates a mandatory parameter.

LTE-TDD cell parameters are the same as LTE-FDD cell parameters. For details, see LTE-FDD cell parameters.

3.9.2 Creating an ACP GroupThe U-Net allows you to create ACP groups. The U-Net can automatically plan cells based on ACP groups.

Prerequisites You have imported geographic data.

You have imported or created base station information, including site, transceiver, and cell information.

You have created computation ares. For basic knowledge about computation areas and methods for creating computation areas, see methods for creating vector objects.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 322 of 474

Page 343: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select ACP.

Step 3 Right-click ACP and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure3-1.

Figure 3-1 New Automatic Cell Planning Group

Step 4 In the displayed Group X dialog box, set parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group.

1. Click the General tab and set basic ACP parameters. For detailed parameter description, see General Tab.

2. Click the Optimization Objectives tab and set an optimization area and its weight. For detailed parameter description, see Optimization Objectives Tab.

Click Area Setting in the navigation tree and set optimization area parameters in the right pane.

Click Objectives in the navigation tree and view information about all optimization objects in the right pane.

Right-click Objectives and choose New from the shortcut menu to create an optimization object, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 New Optimization Objectives

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 323 of 474

Page 344: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Set optimization object parameters in the right pane.

Set an optimization area before creating an optimization object.

3. Click the Optimization Configuration tab and set optimization configuration parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Optimization Configuration Tab.

In the RF Parameter Settings area, set policies for setting optimization configuration parameters.

Click Port Definition.

In the displayed Port Definition dialog box, select a physical antenna in the navigation tree and set the network layer that the antenna port supports in the right pane.

In the displayed Port Definition dialog box, select a port of a physical antenna in the navigation tree and set the antenna beamwidth pattern that the port supports in the right pane.

At least one antenna beamwidth pattern is required for a physical antenna port. The electrical downtilt of an antenna beamwidth pattern must be unique for one

physical antenna port.

Click OK.

Click Antenna Group.

In the displayed Antenna Group window, manage physical antenna groups.

Click OK.

On the Power tab page in the Configuration area, set power parameters.

On the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area, set antenna parameters.

In antenna combination, click Automatic Combination and set antenna combination parameters. For details, see section 3.9.3 "Setting AntennaCombination Parameters."

4. Click the Optimization Cost tab and set optimization cost parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Optimization Cost Tab.

Step 5 Click OK.

The generated ACP group is displayed under the corresponding ACP node.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 324 of 474

Page 345: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

If Calculate now is deselected during the ACP group creation, you can choose ACP > ACP group in the navigation tree, right-click the ACP group, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to set planning parameters. After the planning parameters are set, click Run to calculate the ACP group.

During the planning, you can choose ACP > ACP group on the Operation tab page in the browser window, right-click the ACP group, and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating site planning.

The planning results are displayed in the lower part of the U-Net main window. For detailed parameter description, see Parameter Description: Querying ACP Results.

---End

3.9.3 Setting Antenna Combination Parameters

The U-Net allows you to set antenna combination parameters and create an ACP group in antenna combination scenarios.

Prerequisites You have imported geographic data.

You have imported or created base station information, including site, transceiver, and cell information.

You have created computation ares. For basic knowledge about computation areas and methods for creating computation areas, see methods for creating vector objects.

You have deployed multiple transceivers on a site.

Background Information

You need to set parameters for combining antennas in the following scenarios: introducing new RATs to antenna creation, introducing new RATs to antenna reconstruction, combining antennas, and combining antennas on multiple networks.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select ACP.

Step 3 Right-click ACP and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 325 of 474

Page 346: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 New Automatic Cell Planning Group

Step 4 In the displayed Group X dialog box, set parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group.

Step 5 Click the Optimization Configuration tab.

Step 6 Click the Antenna tab in the Configuration area.

Step 7 Click Automatic Combination.

Step 8 In the displayed Automatic Combination dialog box, set antenna combination parameters. For detailed parameter description, see 3.1.1 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

Step 9 Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

you need to select Uncombined Layer in the Combine Strategy area

In the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area, select

Uncombined Layer.

Right-click Uncombined Layer and choose New Group

from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

In the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area, select

a network layer.

Right-click the network layer and choose Move to >

Combined group from the shortcut menu, as shown in

Figure 3-2.

The network layer is moved to the combined group.

You can select Follow Base Layer, select a network layer

in the navigation tree in the Combine Strategy area, right-

click the network layer and choose Set As Base Layer

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 326 of 474

Page 347: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

If... Then...

from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-3.

The network layer is set as the base network layer.

you need to select Site Level Combine in the Combine Strategy area

Click Browse to import an antenna combination strategy

file.

Figure 3-1 New Combined Group

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 327 of 474

Page 348: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Move to Combined Group

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 328 of 474

Page 349: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Set As Base Layer

Step 10 Click OK.

The U-Net performs antenna combination. Data generated after the antenna combination is displayed on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area.

Step 11 (Optional) Perform antenna combination manually.

On the Antenna tab page, select two or more rows displaying information about the transceivers whose antennas are to be combined.

Click Combine.

In the displayed dialog box, set antenna combination parameters. For detailed parameter description, see Error: Reference source not found.

Click OK.

Step 12 (Optional) Reset the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.

On the Antenna tab page, select one or more rows displaying information about the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.

Click Reset Combination.

The selected transceivers whose antennas have been combined are restored to the status before antenna combination.

Step 13 (Optional) Reset all the transceivers whose antennas have been combined.

Click Reset Combination.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 329 of 474

Page 350: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

All the transceivers whose antennas have been combined are restored to the status before antenna combination.

---End

3.9.4 Querying ACP ResultsAfter an ACP group is calculated, you can query ACP results.

Prerequisites

You have calculated an ACP group.

Background Information

Operations for querying ACP results are the same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD networks. This section uses querying ACP results for an LTE-FDD network as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select ACP.

Step 3 Query the fitness curve.

Right-click ACP and choose Open Curve from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Open Curve

In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to be queried. For detailed parameter description, see Table 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 330 of 474

Page 351: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Parameters in the ACP Display Setting dialog box

Parameter Description

ACP Group Name of an ACP group.

Base Iteration Base iteration.

Compared Iteration Compared iteration, which is compared with a base iteration.

Display Display mode. Base Iteration: A base iteration is displayed. Compared Iteration: A compared iteration is

displayed. Difference: Differences between a base iteration and a

compared iteration are displayed.

In the displayed fitness trend chart, view the fitness and cost changes of each iteration, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Curve

The left vertical coordinate indicates fitness, the right vertical coordinate indicates cost, and the horizontal coordinate indicates the number of iterations.

Step 4 Query the planning result table.

Right-click ACP and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 331 of 474

Page 352: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Open Table

In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to be queried. For detailed parameter description, see Step 31.Table 3-1.

In the displayed window, check the planning results. For detailed parameter description, see Parameter Description: Querying ACP Results.

Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

you need to query RF parameter adjustment statistics

Click RF Parameter Statistics.

In the displayed RF Parameter Statistics dialog box,

query RF parameter adjustment statistics between Base

Iteration and Compared Iteration. For detailed

parameter description, see 3.9.6 I. Step 11.Table 3-2.

In the Detail Statistics area, select RF parameters to be

queried.

In the Detail Statistics area, view RF parameter

adjustment statistics in the left pane and view the

statistics chart in the right pane.

you need to query objective implementation statistics

Click Objectives Statistics.

In the displayed Objectives Statistics dialog box, view

objective implementation statistics. For detailed

parameter description, see 3.9.6 I. Step 11.Table 3-3.

you need to submit ACP results Click Commit.

The ACP results in the table displayed in the window

are applied to NEs.

you need to roll back ACP results

Click Roll Back to Initial Value.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 332 of 474

Page 353: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

If... Then...

The ACP results that have been submitted to NEs are

rolled back to the status before the submission.

you need to export ACP results Click Export.

Set the file format and name, and specify the save path.

Then, click Save.

---End

3.9.5 Displaying ACP Results GeographicallyAfter ACP is complete, you can view ACP results that are geographically displayed.

Prerequisites

ACP is complete.

Background Information

Operations for querying ACP results that are geographically displayed are the same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD networks. This section uses querying ACP results that are geographically displayed for an LTE-FDD network as an example.

Procedure Setting parameters for geographic display

Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Parent counter node > Counter.

Step 3 Right-click the counter and choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 333 of 474

Page 354: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Display Setting

Step 4 In the displayed Display Setting dialog box, set display parameters.

Step 5 Click OK.

Displaying ACP results geographically

Step 6 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 7 In the navigation tree, select ACP.

Step 8 Right-click ACP and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

Step 9 In the displayed ACP Display Setting dialog box, select planning results to be queried and geographically displayed.

Step 10 Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

the planning results of the counters related to an optimization objective need to be geographically displayed

In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Coverage > Counter > Optimization objective, as shown in Figure 3-1.

The map window geographically displays the ACP results of the counters related to the optimization objective.

the planning results of the counters related to an

In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Coverage With Traffic > Counter > Optimization

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 334 of 474

Page 355: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

If... Then...

optimization objective for which the traffic is considered need to be geographically displayed

objective, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Right-click the optimization objective and choose Traffic Setting from the shortcut menu.

In the displayed dialog box, set the volume of traffic to be filtered out.

The map window displays the ACP results of the counters whose traffic volumes are filtered out, which indicates that only the planning results whose traffic volumes are greater than or equal to the preset traffic volumes are displayed.

RF parameter value differences between two iterations need to be geographically displayed

In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Parameter > Parameter, as shown in Figure 3-3.

The map window geographically displays the RF parameter value differences between two iterations.

Figure 3-1 Select Coverage Objective

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 335 of 474

Page 356: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Select Coverage With Traffic Objective

Figure 3-3 Select Parameter

Querying a counter chart

Step 11 Click the Operation tab in the browser window.

Step 12 In the navigation tree, choose ACP > ACP group > Parent counter node > Counter > Optimization objective.

Step 13 Right-click the ACP group and choose Statistics(PDF) or Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 336 of 474

Page 357: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Statistics CDF

Step 14 In the displayed Statistics dialog box, view the PDF or CDF chart for the optimization objective.

A PDF chart displays the percentage of the coverage grid area within each segment to the total area.

A CDF chart displays the trend of coverage area increase as counter data increases.

You can view the PDF or CDF chart only for an optimization objective that contains a counter with a consistent value range.

---End

3.9.6 ACP GUI ReferencesThis section describes the GUIs and parameters for creating an ACP group and querying ACP results.

Parameter Description: Creating an ACP Group

This section describes the parameters for creating an ACP group.

General Tab Page

Table 3-1 Parameters on the General tab page

Parameter Description

Name Name of an ACP group, which uniquely identifies the ACP group.

The U-Net enters a default name for each new ACP group.

Resolution (m) Planning resolution.

Matrix Creation Type Link loss data source type.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 337 of 474

Page 358: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

DT / MR: Link loss data is calculated based on DT or MR data.

Prediction: Link loss data is calculated based on coverage prediction.

DT / MR + Prediction: Link loss data is calculated based on DT or MR data and coverage prediction.

With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered.

Cell edge coverage probability Probability of cell edge coverage, which is the probability that the receive signal strength is stronger than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.

Indoor Coverage Whether penetration loss is considered.

Technology RAT.

Terminal Terminal type.

Service Service type.

DT / MR Options DT or MR data options.

This parameter is available when Matrix Creation Type is set to DT / MR or DT / MR + Prediction.

Priority Whether to use DT data or MR data first. DT first: DT data is used first.

For details about how to import DT data, see the description of importing DT data.

MR first: MR data is used first.

For details about how to import MR data, see the description of importing MR data.

Available DT or MR data is displayed in the lower part of the Priority area.

Check all Whether to select all data.

Mode Planning mode. Fast: fast planning. Advanced: advanced planning.

There are five planning modes from Fast to Advanced, the maximum number of iterations is 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and the fitness thresholds are 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, and 100%, respectively.

This parameter is available when Customized is deselected.

Customized Whether to customize Max iteration count and Fitness threshold.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 338 of 474

Page 359: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Max iteration count Maximum number of iterations.

When the maximum number is reached, the planning stops.

This parameter is available when Customized is selected.

Fitness threshold Fitness threshold.

When the fitness threshold is reached, the planning stops.

This parameter is available when Customized is selected.

Calculate now Whether to immediately calculate an ACP group.

Optimization Objectives Tab Page

Table 3-1 Area Setting parameters

Parameter Description

Optimization Area Area to be optimized.

When you set multiple optimization areas, the optimization areas cannot be overlapped.

If there is an optimization objective in an optimization area, the area cannot be deleted.

Weight Weight of an optimization area.

The value is a positive integer.

A larger weight of an optimization area indicates a higher optimization priority for the area.

Table 3-2 Objectives parameters

Parameter Description

Name Name of an optimization objective, which uniquely identifies the optimization objective.

The U-Net enters a default name for each new optimization objective.

Study Counter for an optimization objective.

Counters for optimization objectives vary according to RATs. For details, see Table 3-3.

Weight Weight of an optimization objective.

The value is a positive integer.

A larger weight of an optimization objective indicates a

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 339 of 474

Page 360: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

higher priority of the optimization objective.

Optimization Area Area to which an optimization objective belongs.

Traffic Map Traffic map and service type.

Only CS or PS services can be selected on a traffic map.

The precision of a traffic map must be the same as the precision of a prediction group.

Layer Network layer for an optimization objective.

Network layers are related to RATs for counters.

A GSM network layer comprises of the GSM RAT and a frequency band.

A UMTS network layer comprises of the UMTS RAT and a frequency number.

An LTE-FDD network layer comprises of the LTE-FDD RAT, a frequency band, and a frequency number.

Study Parameters Counter parameters of an optimization objective.

Counter parameters of optimization objectives vary according to RATs. For details, see Table 3-4.

Table 3-3 Counter parameters for optimization objectives under different RATs

RAT Counter Description

GSM GSM BCCH Signal Level Downlink level.

GSM Overlapping Area Area with high overlapped coverage.

UMTS UMTS RSCP Code power of a downlink pilot signal.

UMTS Ec/Io Code signal-to-noise ratio of a downlink pilot signal.

UMTS Overlapping Area Area with high overlapped coverage.

LTE-FDD LTE RSRP Strength of a downlink reference signal.

LTE RS SINR Signal to interference plus noise ratio of a downlink reference signal.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 340 of 474

Page 361: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-4 Counter parameters of an optimization objective

Counter Parameter Description

GSM BCCH Signal Level

Signal Level Threshold(dBm)

Downlink level threshold.

GSM Overlapping Area Overlapping Signal Level Threshold(dBm)

Level difference threshold of a cell with overlapped coverage.

Overlapping Cell Number Number of cells allowed for overlapped coverage.

Minimum Signal Level Minimum level threshold of a cell with overlapped coverage.

UMTS RSCP RSCP Threshold(dBm) Code power threshold of a downlink pilot signal.

UMTS Ec/Io Ec/Io Threshold(dBm) Code signal-to-noise ratio threshold of a downlink pilot signal.

UMTS Overlapping Area

Overlapping RSCP Threshold(dBm)

Level difference threshold of a cell with pilot pollution adjustment.

Overlapping Cell Number Number of cells allowed for overlapped coverage.

Minimum Signal Level Minimum level threshold of a cell with overlapped coverage.

LTE RSRP RSRP Threshold(dBm) Strength threshold of a downlink reference signal.

LTE RS SINR RS SINR Threshold(dBm) Signal to interference plus noise ratio threshold of a downlink reference signal.

Optimization Configuration Tab Page

Table 3-1 Parameters in the RF Parameter Settings area

Parameter Description

Tuning cell area Adjustment area.

Use manual RF parameter Whether to use manually set RF parameters for calculation.

Tune Setting of RF parameters to be adjusted. Power: whether to adjust power. Mechanical downtilt: whether to adjust a mechanical

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 341 of 474

Page 362: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

downtilt. Electrical downtilt: whether to adjust an electrical

downtilt. Azimuth: whether to adjust an azimuth. Height: whether to adjust height. Antenna Type: whether to adjust an antenna type.

This parameter is unavailable when Use manual RF parameter is selected.

Table 3-2 Parameters in the Port Definition dialog box

Parameter Description

Port Port of a physical antenna.

Layer Range of network layers.

Available Patterns Range of antenna beamwidth patterns.

Selected Patterns Selected antenna beamwidth patterns.

Table 3-3 Parameters in the Antenna Type dialog box

Parameter Description

Physical Antennas Range of physical antennas.

Antenna Groups Set physical antenna group.

Table 3-4 Parameters on the Power tab page in the Configuration area

Parameter Description

Cell Name Name of a cell.

Layer Network layer to which a cell belongs.

Tune Whether to adjust cell power.

If this parameter is selected, cell power can be adjusted.

If this parameter is deselected, cell power cannot be adjusted.

Current Current cell power.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 342 of 474

Page 363: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Range Type Power range type.

Absolute: absolute range.

Relative: relative range.

If Initial is set, the range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Max Maximum power.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Min Minimum power.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Manual Manually set power.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Step Power adjustment step.

This parameter is hidden by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Table 3-5 Parameters on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area

Parameter Description

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of a cell under a transceiver.

Antenna Type Current Antenna beamwidth pattern currently used by a transceiver.

Initial Physical antenna initially used by a transceiver.

This parameter applies to antenna combination scenarios.

Tune Whether to change an antenna type.

Antenna Type

Candidate antenna group of which the type is to be changed.

Electrical Downtilt

Tune Whether to adjust the electrical downtilt of a cell.

If this parameter is selected, the electrical downtilt of a cell can be adjusted.

If this parameter is deselected, the electrical downtilt of a cell cannot be adjusted.

Port Port for a cell.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the ports for cells are displayed based on the sequence of the cells.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 343 of 474

Page 364: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Current Electrical downtilt currently used by a cell.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the electrical downtilts for cells are displayed based on the sequence of the cells.

Range Type

Range type of an electrical downtilt.

Absolute: absolute range.

Relative: relative range.

If Initial is set, the range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Max Maximum electrical downtilt.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [0,10].

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the maximum electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the sequence of the cells.

This parameter is unavailable when Locked is selected.

Min Minimum electrical downtilt.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [0,10].

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the minimum electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the sequence of the cells.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Step Step for adjusting an electrical downtilt.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the steps for adjusting the electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the sequence of the cells.

This parameter is hidden by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Initial Initial electrical downtilt.

The value range is [0,90].

Before setting this parameter, you must set Initial in Antenna Type to set the physical antenna initially used by the transceiver.

The specified electrical downtilt must be supported by the current port.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the initial electrical downtilts for cells are set based on the sequence of cells.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 344 of 474

Page 365: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Manual Manually entered electrical downtilt.

The value range is [0,90].

Before setting this parameter, you must set Initial in Antenna Type to set the physical antenna initially used by the transceiver.

The specified electrical downtilt must be supported by the current port.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the manually entered electrical downtilts for cells must be based on the sequence of cells.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Mechanical Downtilt

Tune Whether to adjust the mechanical downtilt of a transceiver.

Current Mechanical downtilt currently used by a transceiver.

Range Type

Range type for a mechanical downtilt.

Absolute: absolute range.

Relative: relative range.

If Initial is set, the range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Max Maximum mechanical downtilt.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [–90,90].

If Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is [–10,10].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Min Minimum mechanical downtilt.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [–90,90].

If Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is [–10,10].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Step Step for adjusting a mechanical downtilt.

This parameter is hidden by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Initial Initial mechanical downtilt.

The value range is [–90,90].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 345 of 474

Page 366: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Manual Manually entered mechanical downtilt.

The value range is [–90,90].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Azimuth Tune Whether to adjust the azimuth of a transceiver.

Current Current azimuth of a transceiver.

Range Type

Range type of an azimuth.

Absolute: absolute range.

Relative: relative range.

If Initial is set, the range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Max Maximum azimuth.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [0,360).

If Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is [–180,180].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Min Minimum azimuth.

If Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is [0,360).

If Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is [–180,180].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Step Step for adjusting an azimuth.

This parameter is hidden by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Initial Initial azimuth.

The value range is [0,360).

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Manual Manually entered azimuth.

The value range is [0,360).

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Height Tune Whether to adjust the height of a transceiver.

Current Current height of a transceiver.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 346 of 474

Page 367: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Range Range of heights.

Multiple values are separated by ";", for example, 10;20;30.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Initial Initial height.

The value range is [0,10000].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Manual Manually entered height.

The value range is [0,10000].

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Co-Site Synchronization

Whether to keep the heights of transceivers on the same site consistent.

If the selected transceivers are under the same base station, the heights of these transceivers are adjusted simultaneously.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is deselected.

Initial Site Equipment Initial site equipment.

If this parameter is set, Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial TMA Initial TMA.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Feeder Initial feeder.

If this parameter is set, Initial Feeder Length(DL), Initial Site Equipment, and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Feeder Length(DL) Initial downlink feeder length.

Unit: m.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL)

Initial downlink miscellaneous loss.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment must be set.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 347 of 474

Page 368: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Initial Jump Loss Ant-TMA(DL)

Initial downlink jumper loss from a TMA to an antenna port.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Jump Loss TMA-BS(DL)

Initial jumper loss from a downlink TMA to a cabinet top.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Jump Loss Ant-BS(DL)

Initial jumper loss from a downlink antenna to a cabinet top.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is not set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Input Total Loss Method for calculating initial total loss.

If this parameter is selected, total loss is manually entered.

If this parameter is deselected, total loss is calculated by programs.

If this parameter is selected, Initial Total Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Total Loss(DL) Initial downlink total loss, including TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss.

Unit: dB.

Initial Number of Transmission Antenna Ports

Number of initial transmit antenna ports.

If this parameter is set or not set, Initial Number of Transmission Antennas must be set or not set accordingly.

Initial Number of Transmission Antennas

Number of initial transmit antennas.

If this parameter is set or not set, Initial Number of Transmission Antenna Ports must be set or not set accordingly.

Table 3-6 Parameters in the Automatic Combination dialog box

Parameter Description

Combine same Whether to combine only transceivers with the same

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 348 of 474

Page 369: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Location/Height/Azimuth/Mech Tilt. transceivers

locations, heights, azimuths, and mechanical downtilts.

If this parameter is selected, parameters in the Combine Strategy area cannot be set.

Universal Combine Whether to perform a common antenna combination.

This parameter applies to the scenario where all base stations use the same rules to combine antennas.

Site Level Combine Whether to combine antennas at the base station level.

This parameter applies to the scenario where base stations use different rules to combine antennas.

Follow Base Layer Whether to select a basic network layer.

After a base network layer is selected for combining antennas, the azimuth, mechanical downtilt, and height are set to the related values of the base network layer.

This parameter is available when Universal Combine is selected.

Uncombined Layer Network layer where antennas are not combined.

This parameter is available when Universal Combine is selected.

Combined Group Combined group within which antennas at a network layer are combined.

This parameter is available when Universal Combine is selected.

Path Save path of an imported file containing antenna combination rules.

This parameter is available when Site Level Combine is selected.

Minimum included angle limit

Minimum included angle limit after antennas are combined.

The value range is [0,360].

Initial Mechanical Downtilt Whether to use an initial mechanical downtilt.

The value range is [0,15].

If a base network layer is not set, the value of this parameter is used as an initial mechanical downtilt after antennas are combined.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 349 of 474

Page 370: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameters on the Optimization Cost Tab Page

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Optimization Cost tab page

Parameter Description

Max cost Whether to set the maximum cost.

When the maximum cost is reached, the planning stops.

Site Implementation Strategy Site implementation strategy.

Unsorted: Sites are not sorted.

Highest Gain: The highest gain is considered.

Highest Gain Per Cost: Both the gain and cost are considered.

Table 3-2 Parameters in the Site Cost area

Parameter Description

Site Name Name of a site within an adjustment area.

Azimuth Cost Cost for adjusting an azimuth.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Power Cost Cost for adjusting power.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Electrical Downtilt

Cost Cost for adjusting an electrical downtilt.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Mechanical Downtilt

Cost Cost for adjusting a mechanical downtilt.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Height Cost Cost for adjusting antenna height.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Replacing Antenna

Cost Cost for replacing an antenna.

Site Visit Whether to visit a site.

Site Visit Cost Cost for visiting a site.

Site Type Type of a site.

Parameter Description: Querying ACP Results

This section describes the parameters for querying ACP results.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 350 of 474

Page 371: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Parameters for querying ACP results

Parameter Description

Site Name Name of a site.

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of a cell.

Original Azimuth Azimuth used in a base iteration.

Optimized Azimuth Azimuth used in a compared iteration.

Azimuth Difference Difference between the azimuths used in two iterations.

Original Antenna Antenna used in a base iteration.

Optimized Antenna Antenna used in a compared iteration.

Original Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt used in a base iteration.

Optimized Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt used in a compared iteration.

Mechanical Downtilt Difference Difference between the mechanical downtilts used in two iterations.

Original Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt used in a base iteration.

Optimized Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt used in a compared iteration.

Electrical Downtilt Difference Difference between the electrical downtilts used in two iterations.

Original Height Antenna height used in a base iteration.

Optimized Height Antenna height used in a compared iteration.

Height Difference Difference between the antenna heights used in two iterations.

Original Power Power used in a base iteration.

Optimized Power Power used in a compared iteration.

Power Difference Difference between the powers used in two iterations.

Fitness(%) Overall fitness after parameters for a site to which a cell belongs are modified.

Fitness Improvement(%) Improved fitness after parameters for a site to which a cell belongs are modified.

Cost Total cost after parameters for a site to

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 351 of 474

Page 372: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

which a cell belongs are modified.

Cost Improvement Improved cost after parameters for a site to which a cell belongs are modified.

Fitness Improvement/ Cost Improvement Improved fitness per cost unit after parameters for a site to which a cell belongs are modified.

Table 3-2 Parameters in the RF Parameter Statistics dialog box

Parameter Description

Azimuth Number of cells whose azimuths are changed after ACP.

Mechanical Downtilt Number of cells whose mechanical downtilts are changed after ACP.

Electrical Downtilt Number of cells whose electrical downtilts are changed after ACP.

Effective Downtilt Number of cells whose mechanical or electrical downtilts are changed after ACP.

Height Number of cells whose antenna heights are changed after ACP.

Power Number of cells whose power is changed after ACP.

RAT Network layer.

Base Average X Average X (azimuth, mechanical downtilt, electrical downtilt, antenna height, or power) in a base iteration.

Compared Average X Average X (azimuth, mechanical downtilt, electrical downtilt, antenna height, or power) in a compared iteration.

Changes of Average X Average difference between the Xs (azimuths, mechanical downtilts, electrical downtilts, antenna heights, or power) in two iterations.

Table 3-3 Parameters in the Objectives Statistics dialog box

Parameter Description

Optimization Objective Optimization objective.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 352 of 474

Page 373: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Optimization Area Optimized area.

Base Coverage Area (km2) Size of the area achieving the optimization objective in a base iteration.

% of Total Area Percentage of the area achieving the optimization objective in a base iteration in the entire area to be optimized.

Compared Coverage Area (km2) Size of the area achieving the optimization objective in a compared iteration.

% of Total Area Percentage of the area achieving the optimization objective in a compared iteration in the entire area to be optimized.

Weight (Objective Weight * TRF) Weight of a counter.

Base (Weighted) (%) Percentage of the traffic volume for the area achieving the optimization objective in a base iteration in the total traffic volume.

Compared (Weighted) (%) Percentage of the traffic volume for the area that meets the optimization objective in a compared iteration in the total traffic volume.

Difference (%) Difference between the values of Base (With Traffic) (%) and Compared (With Traffic) (%).

3.10 ACP-Automatic Cell PlanningThe U-Net integrates ACP and ASP functions into an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function. The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function applies to the scenarios where both site planning and RF parameter planning are required. This function can be used to plan the locations of sites to be activated and created, and RF parameters including antenna and power parameters and antenna heights. Currently, the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function is only a test function because it cannot replace the independent ACP or ASP function due to the restrictions on the planning methodology, work efficiency, and specifications.

3.10.1 Preparing Data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning

Before performing ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, prepare the following data. After the data is prepared, create a GSM planning project on the U-Net and set the data in the related function modules based on the following sequence.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 353 of 474

Page 374: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Electronic MapAn electronic map provides basic data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning. Based on the electronic map, the U-Net determines the received signal strength and uses it to calculate the signal coverage range for each cell and traffic that can be absorbed by the cell. The U-Net supports electronic maps in Planet, *.TAB, and *.mif formats. During ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, the imported electronic map should contain the following layers: clutter (mandatory), altitude height (mandatory), vector (optional), and building height (mandatory if the Vocanno propagation model is used). For details about how to import an electronic map into the U-Net, see section Error: Reference source not found"Error: Reference source not found."

Engineering Parameter InformationEngineering parameters include information such as the locations, types, frequencies, frequency bands, and cell parameters of all existing and candidate sites, and therefore are the basic data for ACP-Automatic Cell Planning. Before GSM ACP-Automatic Cell Planning, prepare all engineering parameters of candidate sites and import them into the U-Net.

The U-Net supports the import of engineering parameters in TXT, CSV, XLS, and XLSX formats.

Engineering parameters contain the following information:

Site information: site name and location (latitude and longitude)

Antenna information: azimuth, downtilt angle, antenna type, and height

Cell parameters: cell name, frequency band, number of TRXs, LAC, and CI

Engineering parameter template

For details about how to import engineering parameters, see section 2.4 xx

3.10.2 Creating an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group

The U-Net allows you to create an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group. Then, you can use the created group to perform ACP and ASP.

Prerequisites You have imported geographic data.

You have imported or created base station information, including site, transceiver, and cell information.

You have created a computation area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 354 of 474

Page 375: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Procedure

To create an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click in the Project Explorer window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click ACP-Automatic Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 New ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Group

Step 3 In the displayed Group x dialog box, set parameters.

1. Click the General tab, and set parameters on the General tab page, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 355 of 474

Page 376: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Setting parameters on the General tab page

Table 3-1 Parameters on the General tab page

Parameter Description

Name Name of an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group, which uniquely identifies the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group.

The U-Net enters a default name for each new ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group.

Resolution(m) Planning resolution.

The default value is 50m.

A smaller value requires longer calculation time and memory and disk space.

Matrix Creation Type Method of calculating link loss for a cell.

The U-Net provides three calculation methods: DT / MR, Prediction, and DT / MR + Prediction.

Currently, the ACP and ASP use different methods to calculate link loss when MR or DT data is available. Therefore, DT / MR and DT / MR + Prediction are not recommended.

The three methods of calculating link loss are described as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 356 of 474

Page 377: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

DT / MR: Link loss is calculated based on DT or MR data. The U-Net calculates link loss only for the locations where cell MR or DT data is available in cells. No link pass data is available for locations where MR or DT data is unavailable.

Prediction: Link loss is calculated based on prediction. The U-Net calculates link loss based on the radio propagation model, propagation calculation range, and calculation resolution configured for a cell.

DT / MR + Prediction: Link loss is calculated by combining the DT / MR and Prediction modes. If MR or DT data is available in a cell, the U-Net calculates link path for locations based on the DT / MR mode. If MR or DT data is unavailable in a cell, the U-Net calculates link loss based on the Prediction mode.

With shadow Whether shadow fading is considered when link loss is calculated based on the radio propagation model when Prediction is selected.

If this option is selected, the U-Net calculates the shadow fading margin based on Cell edge coverage probability when calculating the coverage based on the radio propagation model. The calculated shadow fading margin will be used for calculating link loss.

Cell edge coverage probability

Probability of cell edge coverage, which is the probability that the received signal strength is greater than the specified threshold at the edge of a cell.

This parameter affects the calculated shadow fading margin.

Indoor Coverage Whether penetration loss is considered when link loss is calculated based on the radio propagation model when Prediction is selected.

If this option is selected, the U-Net considers the penetration loss of each clutter when calculating the coverage signal level.

Technology Radio access technologies (RATs) available in the current project.

You need to set terminal and service information for each RAT. The noise factor in the terminal information and the body loss in the service information affect the calculated coverage signal level.

Terminal Type of a terminal involved in coverage calculation when Prediction is selected.

Service Type of a service involved in coverage calculation when Prediction is selected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 357 of 474

Page 378: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

DT / MR Options Settings of DT and MR data, which are used for selecting DT or MR data sources and the DT or MR data priority for calculation when Matrix Creation Type is set to DT / MR or DT / MR + Prediction.

Available DT or MR data is displayed in the lower part of the Priority area. You can select Check all to select all data.

This option is not recommended in the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function.

DT first When this option is selected, DT data is used preferentially if both DT and MR data is available. For details about how to import DT data, see "Importing DT Data" in U-Net Online Help.

MR first When this option is selected, MR data is used preferentially if both DT and MR data is available. For details about how to import MR data, see "Importing MR Data" in U-Net Online Help.

Conversion Setting Settings of link loss conversion.

This function is available when Matrix Creation Type is set to MR / DT or MR / DT + Prediction. This function is not recommended in the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning function.

Calculate now Whether to calculate the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group immediately.

And you select this option and click OK, the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning calculation starts immediately.

2. Click the Objectives tab and set the computation area, coverage objectives, and capacity objectives on the Objectives tab page.

1) Choose Area Setting from the navigation tree in the left pane, and select a computation area in the right pane.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 358 of 474

Page 379: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Parameters on the Objectives tab page – Area Settings

Computation area: area for calculation. After a computation area is selected, you can set coverage and capacity objectives for it. The U-Net selects sites and adjusts RF parameters to achieve the objectives within the computation area.

2) Choose Coverage Objectives from the navigation tree in the left pane, and check information about all coverage optimization objectives in the right pane.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 359 of 474

Page 380: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-3 Parameters on the Objectives tab page – Coverage Objectives

3) Right-click Coverage Objectives and choose New from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Group 1 dialog box, create a coverage objective and set related parameters in the right pane. You can create multiple optimization objectives to facilitate planning.

When planning both sites and RF parameters, the U-Net uses only the preset RSRP study for site planning. Other studies only affect RF parameter planning.

Figure 3-4 New Coverage Objectives

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 360 of 474

Page 381: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-5 Creating an optimization objective

Table 3-1 Parameters of an optimization objective

Parameter Description

Name Name of an optimization objective, which uniquely identifies the optimization objective.

The U-Net enters a default name for each new optimization objective.

Study Study for an optimization objective.

Studies for optimization objectives vary according to RATs. An LTE network supports RSRP and RS SINR studies.

Weight Weight of an optimization objective.

The value is a positive integer.

A larger weight indicates a higher priority of the optimization objective.

Optimization Area Area for an optimization objective, which must be the same as the computation area.

Traffic Map If CS and PS traffic volumes at each location are used as weights of problems during RF parameter optimization, you can select a related CS or traffic map.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 361 of 474

Page 382: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

The resolution of the traffic map must be the same as that of the coverage prediction group.

Layer Network layer for an optimization objective.

Network layers are related to the RATs for studies:

The GSM network layer information comprises of GSM and a frequency band.

The UMTS network layer information comprises of UMTS and an ARFCN.

The LTE FDD/TDD network layer information comprises of LTE FDD/TDD, a frequency band, and an ARFCN.

Study Parameters Study parameters for an optimization objective.

Study parameters for optimization objectives vary according to RATs. For the RSRP study, you need to set RSRP Threshold and Target Coverage Ratio. For the RS SINR study, you need to set RS SINR Threshold and Target Coverage Ratio.

Target Coverage Ratio is the percentage of areas that meets the predefined threshold within a computation area to the total computation area.

4) Choose Capacity Objectives from the navigation tree in the left pane, and check information about all capacity optimization objectives in the right pane.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 362 of 474

Page 383: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-6 Setting parameters of a capacity objective

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Capacity Objectives area

Parameter Description

Technology Radio access technologies (RATs) available in the current project.

You can set different capacity planning objectives for different RATs.

Used Whether to use the traffic statistics of a RAT.

If this option is selected, the U-Net uses the traffic map of the related RAT to help determine site locations during site planning for coverage problems.

If this option is selected, all frequency bands of the related RAT are displayed in the Layer setting table in the lower part. You can set capacity planning parameters for each frequency band.

Resolve Capacity overload Whether to resolve capacity overload for a cell of a RAT.

If this option is selected, the U-net resolve cell capacity overload during site planning by expanding the capacity of existing sites, selecting sites, and adding macro or micro sites.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network,

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 363 of 474

Page 384: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

the calculation results are not affected.

Traffic Map Traffic map to be used for site planning.

The traffic data in the traffic map can be used as weights of grids to help determine site locations for solving weak-coverage problems. The traffic data can also be used to calculate the load of a cell and then determine whether the cell is overloaded.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

Prefer FreqBand Preferred frequency band.

This parameter specified a frequency band for preferentially absorbing traffic under a RAT. When a location is covered by several cells of the same RAT but on different frequency bands, the traffic at this location can be absorbed by the cell on the preferred frequency band under certain conditions.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

Minimum Signal Level (dBm) Minimum signal level of a cell on the preferred frequency band.

When the cell coverage signal level on the preferred frequency band is greater than the threshold at a location, the traffic will be absorbed by the cell on the preferred frequency band.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

Layer Network layer under a RAT. This option is used to set capacity planning parameters at different layers for GSM, UMTS or LTE and the settings apply to site planning.

Allow Expansion Whether capacity expansion is allowed.

If this option is selected, when a sector is overloaded, it's capacity can be expanded by adding TRXs under GSM or carriers under UMTS.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

Add New Sector Whether to add an inter-frequency sector.

If this option is selected, when a cell on a frequency band is overloaded and the problem cannot be resolved by expanding the cell capacity, you can create an inter-

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 364 of 474

Page 385: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

frequency sector that has the same azimuth as the overloaded cell to share traffic.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

New Sector Antenna Antenna for an inter-frequency sector. If Add New Sector is selected, you can set an antenna type for a new sector.

New Cell Propagation Model Radio propagation model for an inter-frequency sector.

If this option is selected, you can set a radio propagation model for a new sector.

Max TRX/Carrier Per Sector Maximum number of TRXs or carriers allowed by each sector.

If Allow Expansion is selected, the number of new carriers for UMTS or TRXs for GSM cannot exceed the threshold.

The LTE network does not support this parameter. Therefore, even this parameter is set for the LTE network, the calculation results are not affected.

3. Click the Configuration tab, and set optimization parameters on the Configuration tab page.

Figure 3-7 Setting parameters on the Configuration tab page

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 365 of 474

Page 386: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

1) In the Optimization Options area, set policies for reconfiguring parameters.

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Optimization Options area

Parameter Description

Tuning cell area Adjustment area.

It is recommended that the adjustment area be consistent with the computation area.

Optimization Options Settings of RF parameters to be adjusted: Power: whether to adjust the power. Mechanical downtilt: whether to adjust the mechanical

downtilt angle. Electrical downtilt: whether to adjust the electrical

downtilt angle. Azimuth: whether to adjust the azimuth. Height: whether to adjust the height. Antenna Type: whether to adjust the antenna type.

2) Click Port Definition. In the displayed Port Definition dialog box, choose a physical antenna from the navigation tree in the left pane, and set the network layers supported by the ports of the physical antenna in the right pane. The settings ensure that an antenna with multiple ports can be used under different RATs.

Choose a port of a physical antenna from the navigation tree in the left pane, and set the antenna sidelobe pattern supported by the port in the right pane. The settings are used to optimize the electrical downtilt angle.

3) Right-click a physical antenna and choose Add Port from the shortcut menu to add a port for the antenna. Then, you can set RATs network layers, antenna sidelobe patterns supported by the port.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 366 of 474

Page 387: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-8 Defining antenna ports

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Port Definition dialog box

Parameter Description

Port Port of a physical antenna.

Layer Available network layers.

Available Patterns Available antenna sidelobe patterns.

Selected Patterns Selected antenna sidelobe patterns.

4) Click Antenna Group. In the displayed Antenna Group dialog box, set an antenna group.

You can define multiple physical antennas in the antenna group. When adjusting the antenna type, the U-Net selects a proper antenna from the antenna group to replace the existing antenna.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 367 of 474

Page 388: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-9 Defining an antenna group

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Antenna Group dialog box

Parameter Description

Physical Antennas Available physical antennas.

Antenna Groups Physical antenna groups that have been set.

New Group Used to add an antenna group in the Antenna Groups area.

Delete Used to delete selected antenna groups in the Antenna Groups area.

> Used to move selected physical antennas from the Physical Antennas area in the left pane to the selected antenna groups in the Antenna Groups area in the right pane.

< Used to move selected physical antennas from the Antenna Groups area in the right pane to the Antenna Groups area in the left pane.

5) In the Site Selection Options area, set site planning policies.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 368 of 474

Page 389: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-2 Parameters in the Site Selection Options area

Parameter Description

Site Selection Whether to select candidate sites.

When this option is selected, you can set candidate sites on the Sites tab page in the Configuration area.

Macro site addition Whether to add macro sites.

When this option is selected, you can solve coverage and capacity problems within a computation area by adding macro sites.

Micro site addition Whether to add micro sites.

When this option is selected, you can solve coverage and capacity problems within a computation area by adding micro sites.

Define site template Used to define templates for adding macro and micro sites in the displayed dialog box.

The U-Net uses defined macro and micro site templates to deploy related sites at planned locations and predict the coverage signal level. Based on the prediction results, the U-Net can analyze whether weak-coverage and cell overload problems are solved after sites are added.

You can modify parameters in site templates using the function of defining site templates on the U-Net.

Set Clutter Constraint Used to set cutter to which sites can be added in the displayed dialog box.

6) Click the Power tab and set power optimization parameters on the Power tab page.

Figure 3-10 Setting parameters on the Power tab page

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 369 of 474

Page 390: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Power tab page in the Configuration area

Parameter Description

Cell Name Name of a cell.

Layer Network layer of a cell.

Tune Whether to adjust the cell power.

If this parameter is selected, the cell power can be adjusted.

If this parameter is not selected, the cell power cannot be adjusted.

Current Current cell power.

Range Type Power range type.

Absolute: absolute power range.

Relative: power range related to the value in Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Max Maximum power.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Min Minimum power.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Step Power adjustment step.

This parameter is not displayed by default.You can right-click the table on the Power tab page and choose Display Columns from the shortcut menu to show this parameter.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

7) Click the Antenna tab and set antenna optimization parameters on the Antenna tab page.

Automatic Combination, Combine, Reset Combination, and Reset All in the bottom of the Antenna tab page are used in co-antenna scenarios and are not recommended for the ACP-Automatic Cell planning function. For details about these functions, see "Setting Antenna Combination Parameters" in U-Net Online Help.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 370 of 474

Page 391: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-11 Setting parameters on the Antenna tab page

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Antenna tab page in the Configuration area

Parameter Description

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of a cell under a transceiver.

Antenna Type Current Antenna sidelobe pattern currently used by a transceiver.

Initial Initial physical antenna used by a transceiver.

This parameter applies to antenna combination scenarios.

Tune Whether to adjust the antenna type.

Antenna Group

Candidate antenna group for antenna type adjustment.

When the antenna type can be adjusted, the U-Net selects a proper physical antenna from the candidate antenna group to replace the current physical antenna.

Electrical Downtilt Tune Whether to adjust the electrical downtilt angle of a cell.

If this parameter is selected, the electrical downtilt angle of a cell can be adjusted.

If this parameter is not selected, the electrical downtilt angle of a cell cannot be adjusted.

Port Port of a cell.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the ports of cells are displayed based on the cell sequence.

Different ports define degrees of all available electrical downtilt angles of a cell. The U-Net selects a proper Pattern file only from the antenna pattern files defined for the port.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 371 of 474

Page 392: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Current Current electrical downtilt angle of a cell.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the electrical downtilt angles of cells are displayed based on the cell sequence.

Range Type

Range type of the electrical downtilt angle.

Absolute: absolute range of the electrical downtilt angle.

Relative: relative range of the electrical downtilt angle.

If Initial is set, the power range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the power range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Max Maximum electrical downtilt angle.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from 0 to 10.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the maximum electrical downtilt angles of cells must be set based on the cell sequence.

This parameter is unavailable when Locked is selected.

Min Minimum electrical downtilt angle.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from 0 to 10.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the minimum electrical downtilt angle must be set for each cell.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Step Step for adjusting an electrical downtilt angle.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the step for adjusting the electrical downtilt angle of each cell must be set.

This parameter is not displayed by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Initial Initial electrical downtilt angle.

The value range is from 0 to 90.

Before setting this parameter, You must set Initial under Antenna Type, which means that you must set the initial physical antenna used by the transceiver.

The entered electrical downtilt angle must be supported by the current port.

If there are multiple cells under a transceiver, the initial electrical downtilt angle must be set for each cell.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 372 of 474

Page 393: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Mechanical Downtilt

Tune Whether to adjust the mechanical downtilt angle of a transceiver.

Current Mechanical downtilt angle that is currently used by a transceiver.

Range Type

Range type for a mechanical downtilt angle.

Absolute: absolute range of the mechanical downtilt angle.

Relative: relative range of the mechanical downtilt angle.

If Initial is set, the power range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the power range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Max Maximum mechanical downtilt angle.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from –90 to 90.

When Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is from –10 to 10.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Min Minimum mechanical downtilt angle.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from –90 to 90.

When Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is from –10 to 10.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Step Step for adjusting a mechanical downtilt angle.

This parameter is not displayed by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Initial Initial mechanical downtilt angle.

The value range is from –90 to 90.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Azimuth Tune Whether to adjust the azimuth of a transceiver.

Current Current azimuth of a transceiver.

Range Type

Azimuth range type.

Absolute: absolute range of the azimuth.

Relative: relative range of the azimuth.

If Initial is set, the power range is relative to Initial. If Initial is not set, the power range is relative to Current.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 373 of 474

Page 394: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Max Maximum azimuth.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from 0 to 360, excluding 360.

When Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is from –180 to 180.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Min Minimum azimuth.

When Range Type is set to Absolute, the value range is from 0 to 360, excluding 360.

When Range Type is set to Relative, the value range is from –180 to 180.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Step Step for adjusting an azimuth.

This parameter is not displayed by default.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Initial Initial azimuth.

The value range is from 0 to 360, excluding 360.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Height Tune Whether to adjust the height of a transceiver.

Current Current height of a transceiver.

Range Available heights.Multiple heights are separated by a semicolon (;), for example, 10;20;30.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Initial Initial height.

The value range is from 0 to 10000.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Manual Manually entered height.

The value range is from 0 to 10000.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Co-Site Synchronization

Whether to keep the heights of co-site transceivers consistent.

If the selected transceivers are at the same site, the heights of these transceivers are adjusted simultaneously.

This parameter is unavailable when Tune is not selected.

Initial Site Equipment Initial site equipment.

If this parameter is set, Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 374 of 474

Page 395: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Initial TMA Initial TMA.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Feeder Initial feeder.

If this parameter is set, Initial Feeder Length(DL), Initial Site Equipment, and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Feeder Length(DL) Initial downlink feeder length.

Unit: m.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL)

Initial downlink miscellaneous loss.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment must be set.

Initial Jump Loss Ant-TMA(DL)

Initial downlink jumper loss from the TMA to the antenna port.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Jump Loss TMA-BS(DL)

Initial jumper loss from the downlink TMA to the cabinet top.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Jump Loss Ant-BS(DL)

Initial jumper loss from the downlink antenna to the cabinet top.

Unit: dB.

If this parameter is set, Initial Site Equipment and Initial Miscellaneous Tx Loss(DL) must be set.

If Initial TMA is not set, this parameter must be set.

Initial Input Total Loss Method of calculating the initial total loss.

If this parameter is selected, you need to enter the total loss.

If this parameter is not selected, the U-Net calculates the total loss.

If this parameter is selected, Initial Total Loss (DL) must be set.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 375 of 474

Page 396: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Initial Total Loss(DL) Initial downlink total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, and miscellaneous loss.

Unit: dB.

Initial Number of Transmission Antenna Ports

Number of initial TX antenna ports.

This parameter must be set or not be set together with Initial Number of Transmission Antennas.

Initial Number of Transmission Antennas

Number of initial TX antennas.

This parameter must be set or not be set together with Initial Number of Transmission Antenna Ports.

8) Click the Sites tab and set antenna optimization parameters on the Sites tab page.

Figure 3-12 Setting parameters on the Sites tab page

Table 3-1 Parameters on the Sites tab page in the Configuration area

Parameter Description

Site Name Name of an existing or candidate site on the live network.

Layer Network layer at a site.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 376 of 474

Page 397: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Original Status Initial site status.The value can be Existed or Candidate. Existed: A site is available and deployed on the live network.

The site is used for initial network capacity and coverage calculation, and it is not used for site selection.

Candidate: A site is a candidate site. The site is not used for calculating initial network coverage and capacity calculation.

Locked Whether a candidate site is locked.

If a candidate site is locked, the U-Net selects it directly and then selects other candidate sites during site planning.

Excluded Whether a site is excluded.

If a site is excluded, it will not be used for site planning.

Site Type Type of a site: macro or micro site.

Site Cost Score of the site cost.

A higher site cost score indicates a lower power probability a candidate site will be selected.

Site Priority Priority of a site.

The value 0 indicates the lowest priority. A higher priority indicates a higher power probability a candidate site will be selected.

The final score of Site Priority and Site Cost determines the final site selection priority.

User Define 1 Score of user-defined dimension 1.

User Define 2 Score of user-defined dimension 2.

User Define 3 Score of user-defined dimension 3.

Comments Comments on sites.

4. Click the Costs tab, and set optimization cost parameters on the Costs tab page.

Cost parameters are not proper and therefore are not recommended in the ACP-Automatic Cell planning function.

Step 4 Click OK.

The created ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group is displayed under the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning node.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 377 of 474

Page 398: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

3.10.3 Checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results

After an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group is calculated, you can check the planning results.

Prerequisites

You have calculated an ACP-Automatic Cell Planning group.

Context

Operations of checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results are the same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE FDD. This section uses the operations of checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results for LTE FDD as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 Click in the Project Explorer window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click a planning group under the ACP-Automatic Cell Planning node and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

Figure 3-1 Open Table

Step 3 In the displayed table window, check the planning results.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 378 of 474

Page 399: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Planning result table

Table 3-1 Parameters for checking ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results

Parameter Description

Site Name Name of a site.

Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver.

Cell Name Name of a cell.

Layer Network layer of a cell.

Longitude Longitude of a cell.

Latitude Latitude of a cell.

Tuned Whether RF parameters such as Antenna Type, Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Electrical Downtilt, Height, and Power have been adjusted.

States Initial: initial cell status.

Final: final cell status.

Antenna Type Initial: initial physical antenna of a cell.

Final: final physical antenna of a cell.

Azimuth Initial: initial azimuth of a cell.

Final: final azimuth of a cell.

Difference: difference of the azimuths of a cell before and after the adjustment.

Mechanical Downtilt Initial: initial mechanical downtilt angle of a cell.

Final: final mechanical downtilt angle of a cell.

Difference: difference of the mechanical downtilt angles of a cell before and after the adjustment.

Electrical Downtilt Initial: initial electrical downtilt angle of a cell.

Final: final electrical downtilt angle of a cell.

Difference: difference of the electrical downtilt angles

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 379 of 474

Page 400: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

of a cell before and after the adjustment.

Height Initial: initial antenna height for a cell.

Final: final antenna height for a cell.

Difference: difference of the antenna heights for a cell before and after the adjustment.

Power Initial: initial TX power of a cell.

Final: final TX power of a cell.

Difference: difference of the TX power of a cell before and after the adjustment.

Coverage Area(km2) Initial: initial coverage area for a best serving cell.

Final: final coverage area for a best serving cell.

Poor Coverage Ratio: percentage of the poor coverage area.

CS Traffic(Erlang) Initial: initial CS traffic absorbed by a cell.

Final: final CS traffic absorbed by a cell.

PS Traffic(KByte) Initial: initial PS traffic absorbed by a cell.

Final: final PS traffic absorbed by a cell.

HSDPA Traffic Volume(KBytes) Initial: initial HSDPA traffic absorbed by a cell.

Final: final HSDPA traffic absorbed by a cell.

This parameter value is available only to UMTS cells.

Traffic Overflow Initial: initial cell traffic overload percentage.

Final: final cell traffic overload percentage.

This parameter value is empty for the LTE network because the LTE network does not support capacity evaluation.

TRXs/Carriers Initial: initial number of TRXs or carriers under a sector.

Required: number of TRXs or carriers required for the planning.

Max: maximum number of TRXs or carriers allowed under a sector.

Final: final number of TRXs or carriers under a sector. The larger numbers in the initial and planned values are used.

Required to Add: number of TRXs or carriers to be added.

This parameter value is empty for the LTE network because the LTE network does not support capacity evaluation.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 380 of 474

Page 401: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

1. Perform the following operations as required.

If you need to... Then…

Check the overview of RF parameter adjustment and site planning results

1. Click Changes Summary.

2. In the displayed Changes Summary dialog box,

check the number of selected sites, number of new

macro sites, number of micro sites, number of sites

whose capacity is expanded at each network layer,

and number of cells for which the following

parameters are adjusted on the live network:

azimuth, mechanical and electrical downtilt angles,

height, power, and antenna.

3. You can check the numbers of adjusted sites and

cells in the bar charts in the lower part of the dialog

box.

Check objective achievement statistics

1. Click Objectives Statistics.

2. In the displayed Objectives Statistics dialog box,

check the objective achievement statistics.

Check the sort results of selected and new sites or RF parameter optimization

1. Click Changes Order.

2. In the

displayed Changes Order dialog box, check the sort

results of site planning results and RF parameter

optimization for each RAT.

Commit ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results

Click Commit.

The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results including the RF parameters adjustment results for new cells and existing cells on the live network in the window will be applied to NEs.

Export ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results

1. Click Export.

2. Set the file format and name, and specify a save path

for the file. Then, click Save.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 381 of 474

Page 402: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-2 Checking RF parameter adjustment and site planning results

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Change Summary dialog box

Parameter Description

Layer Network layer.

Display Whether to display the current network layer.

Selected Site Number of selected sites for site planning.

New Macro Site Number of new macro sites for site planning.

New Micro Site Number of new micro sites for site planning.

Expansion Number of cells whose power is changed after the planning.

Azimuth Number of cells whose azimuths are changed after the planning.

Mechanical Number of cells whose mechanical downtilts are changed after the planning.

Electrical Number of cells whose electrical downtilts are changed after the planning.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 382 of 474

Page 403: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Height Number of cells whose antenna heights are changed after the planning.

Power Number of cells whose power is changed after the planning.

Antenna Type Number of cells whose physical antenna types are changed after the planning.

Figure 3-3 Checking objective achievement statistics

Table 3-1 Parameters in the Objectives Statistics dialog box

Parameter Description

Area Area for an optimization objective.

Layer Network layer for an optimization objective.

Study Study for an optimization objective.

Target Coverage Ratio(%) Target coverage percentage of the objective.

Initial(%) Initial coverage percentage.

Initial Area(km2) Initial coverage area.

Final(%) Final coverage percentage.

Final Area(km2) Final coverage area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 383 of 474

Page 404: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameter Description

Improvement(%) Improvement percentage.

Improvement percentage = Initial coverage achievement percentage – Final coverage achievement percentage

Improvement Area(km2) Improvement area.

Improvement area = Initial coverage achievement area – Final coverage achievement area

----End

3.10.4 Displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning Results on a Map

After ACP-Automatic Cell Planning is complete, you can check the planning results displayed on a map.

Prerequisites

The ACP-Automatic Cell Planning is complete.

Context

Operations of displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results on a map are the same for GSM, UMTS, and LTE FDD. This section uses the operations of displaying ACP-Automatic Cell Planning results on a map for LTE FDD as an example.

Procedure

To set parameters for geographical display, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Click in the Project Explorer window.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose ACP-Automatic Cell Planning > a planning group > a network layer > an optimization objective > Final/Initial/Difference. Right-click Final/Initial/Difference and choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 384 of 474

Page 405: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Display Setting

Step 3 In the displayed Display Setting dialog box, set display parameters.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 You can select or clear a node ion the navigation tree to show or hide the initial and final results of the related study.

----End

To check study statistics in charts, perform the following steps:

Step 6 Click in the Project Explorer window.

Step 7 In the navigation tree, choose ACP-Automatic Cell Planning > a planning group > a network layer > a study > an optimization objective. Right-click the optimization objective and choose Statistics(PDF) or Statistics(CDF) from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 385 of 474

Page 406: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 3-1 Statistics CDF

Step 8 In the displayed Statistics dialog box, check the PDF or CDF statistics chart for the current objective.

The PDF statistics chart displays the percentage of the area for the coverage grids within each range to the total area.

The CDF statistics chart displays the increase trend of the coverage area with the increase of study values.

You can view the PDF or CDF chart only for an optimization objective that contains a counter with continuous values.

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 386 of 474

Page 407: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4 Appendix

4.1 Obtaining Engineering Parameter Templates of the U-Net Quickly

The U-Net provides the function of automatically exporting the engineering parameter template so that network planning engineers can quickly prepare engineering parameters required by the U-Net. After configuring related information based on the engineering parameter template, you can directly import the configured information to the U-Net more convenient and much quicker. In addition, the function provides best reference for users who use the U-Net for the first time. They can quickly know the parameters required by the planning.

The procedure for obtaining the engineering parameter templates is as follows:

Step 1 Choose File > Generate Engineering Parameter Template, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 387 of 474

Page 408: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Exporting the engineering parameter template

Step 2 You must prepare the default parameters. Also, you can set optional engineering parameters based on the network system information and scenarios (export engineering parameters based on the coverage prediction or neighboring cell planning). The following is an example of setting parameters in the LTE-FDD network.

Common counters are selected by default to facilitate your selection. You can deselect default counters as required. The Site Name study must be selected for a site. The Site Name and Transceiver Name counters must be selected for a transceiver. The Transceiver Name and Cell Name counters must be selected for a cell. You can select other counters as required. To successfully import data, the mapping among Site Name, Transceiver Name, and Cell Name must be correct, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 388 of 474

Page 409: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a site

Figure 4-2 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a transceiver

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 389 of 474

Page 410: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Exporting the engineering parameter template of a cell

----End

4.2 PolygonThe ATOLL provides multiple zones. Compared with the ATOLL, the U-Net provides polygons that can be configured more flexible and convenient. The U-Net provides polygons of only one type and does not distinguish polygons by functions. You can select polygons based on concrete services. For example, you can select a prediction area in the prediction group window when the prediction is performed and select a planning area in the neighboring cell planning window when the neighboring cell planning is performed.

4.2.1 Creating a PolygonYou can right-click Polygon and choose New, as shown in Figure 4-1. Also, you can click the Add Polygon button on the tool bar, as shown in Figure 4-2. Then, you can draw a polygon on the GIS map. After drawing a polygon, double-click the polygon to generate the required polygon. After a polygon is generated, a corresponding node is generated under Polygons on the GEO tab page, as shown in Figure 4-3.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 390 of 474

Page 411: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Creating a polygon (1)

Figure 4-2 Creating a polygon (2)

Figure 4-3 Creating a polygon (3)

4.2.2 Polygon OperationsOn the node of the navigation tree, you can perform operations on a polygon, such as Properties, Statistic, Rename, Export, Center in The Map, and Delete.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 391 of 474

Page 412: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Polygon operations

On the GIS map, right-click the line or point of a polygon and choose operations such as Properties, Show Polygon Name, Add Point, Edit Point, Delete Point, and Delete Polygon.

Figure 4-2 Polygon operations

Move the cursor to the frame of the polygon. You can view simple properties of the polygon, such as name, area, top boundary, bottom boundary, left boundary, and right boundary.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 392 of 474

Page 413: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Viewing properties of a polygon

4.2.3 Setting the Properties of a PolygonYou can set the properties of a polygon such as the location, color, and display mode. The operation procedure is as follows:

Right-click a polygon on the node of the navigation tree or on the GIS map and choose Properties to display the Polygon Properties window.

Figure 4-1 Displaying the properties of a polygon

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 393 of 474

Page 414: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Polygon properties (1)

(Region Properties: On the Region Properties tab page, you can set the name of the polygon, and set whether the polygon name and comments are displayed on the GIS map.)

Figure 4-3 Polygon properties (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 394 of 474

Page 415: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

(Points List: On the Points List tab page, you can add, delete, or edit the point comprising the polygon in X/Y or Longitude/Latitude mode.)

Figure 4-4 Polygon properties (3)

(Font: On the Font tab page, you can modify the display font of the polygon name.)

Figure 4-5 Polygon properties (4)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 395 of 474

Page 416: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

(Color & Line: On the Color & Line tab page, you can modify the frame color of the polygon, filling color of the polygon, and line width.)

4.2.4 Combing PolygonsYou can combine polygons as required. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator to display the Polygon Operator window.

Figure 4-1 Polygon operations (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 396 of 474

Page 417: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Polygon operations (2)

Step 2 Choose a combination mode (Intersect, Union, or Exclude) and select the polygons to be combined in the Current Polygons area. Then, click Run to generate a new polygon in the Output area. You can rename or delete the generated polygon, as show in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 397 of 474

Page 418: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Polygon operations (3)

----End

4.2.5 Polygon UsageAfter a polygon is created, the polygon can be used in multiple services and has different meanings. The following is an example of a polygon in the prediction scenario. Polygon used in the prediction scenario: You can select a polygon in a prediction group. The polygon represents that the prediction is performed only in the polygon, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 398 of 474

Page 419: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Polygon usage

4.3 Point AnalysisThe U-Net provides the point analysis function to analyze the signal status at a point. For example, signals of some regions are abnormal during the prediction or two cells that may be neighboring cells according to their geographical locations are actually not neighboring cells during the neighboring cell planning based on coverage. In the preceding scenarios, you can use the point analysis function to analysis the signal status in details.

Click on the tool bar to display the point analysis window. The mouse

pointer changes to , indicating the location of the receiver. Right-click the circle and choose Coordinate to set the coordinate of the point.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 399 of 474

Page 420: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Point analysis (1)

Figure 4-2 Point analysis (2)

4.3.1 Viewing Signal Statuses from Each Cell to the Point Respectively

In the point analysis window shown in Figure 4-1, click Profile. You can view the signal receiving status of the receiver by choosing different cells in the point analysis window. If you want to compare the current result with the prediction result, you can set the point analysis parameters based on parameters of the prediction group. The parameter description is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 400 of 474

Page 421: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Point analysis (3)

Parameters on the upper part of the window are as follows:

Figure 4-2 Point analysis (4)

Transceiver: indicates the selected transceiver.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability: indicates the cell edge coverage probability. This parameter is used to calculate the shadow fading margin. This parameter is the same as that in the prediction group.

Indoor Coverage: indicates whether the penetration loss is taken into consideration. If this parameter is selected, the penetration loss is taken into consideration. If this parameter is not selected, the penetration loss is not taken into consideration. This parameter is the same as that in the prediction group.

Cell: indicates the selected cell. The terrain profile between the selected cell and the terminal is analyzed.

DL RSRP: indicates the downlink RSRP strength from the selected cell to the receiver.

If you want to view the downlink path loss from the selected cell to the receiver, choose Path Loss.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 401 of 474

Page 422: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Point analysis (5)

You can view the terrain profile between the transceiver and the receiver on the lower part of the point analysis window.

Figure 4-4 Point analysis (6)

The blue ellipsoid is the Fresnel region for calculating the diffraction. The green line indicates the horizon propagation distance. Right-click the terrain profile and choose Link Budget to check the conditions related to the link budget. When the cell propagation model is SPM, you can choose Model Details to view the detailed information about the propagation model. Right-click the terrain profile and choose Copy to copy the current terrain profile to the shear plate of the operating system.

4.3.2 Viewing Signal Status from Each Cell to the Point Simultaneously

In the point analysis window, choose Reception.

Figure 4-1 Point analysis (7)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 402 of 474

Page 423: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

You can view all cells and signal strengths when the dynamic scope of the signal strength received by the receiver in the location is about 30 dB. The function is similar to that of the Overlapping Zones study. If the number of cells whose signals can cover the point is larger, the number of the cells interfering the main service cell is larger.

You can also click Results to display the Results window, as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 Point analysis (8)

You can view not only the received signal strength of all transceiver but also the latitude/longitude, altitude height, and terrain type of the receiver in the specified location.

4.3.3 Viewing Signal Statuses of Pilots and Services of the Best Server Cell

You can choose Signal Analysis in the point analysis window. After setting parameters such as Terminal, Service, and Mobility, you can double click Downlink or Uplink to view signal statuses of pilots and services of the best server cell. If you want to compare counters in the current window with studies in the predication group, you need to ensure that parameter settings in the prediction group are the same as those for the point analysis.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 403 of 474

Page 424: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Point analysis (9)

Terminal: indicates a terminal type of the receiver.

Mobility: indicates the mobility type of the receiver.

Service: indicates the service type of the receiver.

Neighbour PDSCH Load(%): indicates the interference on the neighbor PDSCH.

Neighbour PDSCH Load(%): indicates the interference on the neighbor PDCCH.

Prediction results of receiving signal strength of different cells are displayed in the Reference Signal Reception area in the histogram in a descending order. The cell with the strongest receiving strength is the best server cell at the specified location.

You can view the pilot signals, service signals, and whether the uplink and the downlink are abnormal on the right part of the point analysis window. You can click Downlink to display the related downlink signal status and click Uplink to display the related uplink signal status.

Figure 4-2 Point analysis (10)

The downlink result is displayed as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 404 of 474

Page 425: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Point analysis (11)

Received Reference Signal Level: indicates the strength of the pilot signal received by the terminal.

PDSCH Total Noise(I+N): indicates the sum of the interference power received by the terminal and the noise power of the terminal.

Reference Signal C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the reference signal.

PDSCH C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the downlink traffic channel.

Bearer: indicates the modulation and demodulation mode used by the terminal.

PDSCH Peak Throughput: indicates the peak throughput of the downlink traffic channel.

The uplink result is displayed as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 405 of 474

Page 426: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-4 Point analysis (12)

Received PUSCH POWER: indicates the strength of the uplink signal received by the cell.

Transmission Power: indicates the transmit power of the terminal.

PUSCH Total Noise(I+N): indicates the sum of the interference power received by the cell and the noise power of the cell.

PUSCH C/(I+N): indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink traffic channel.

Bearer: indicates the demodulation and modulation mode used by the cell.

PUSCH Peak Throughput: indicates the peak throughput of the uplink traffic channel.

The point analysis function can use output parameters of capacity simulation results as input parameters for calculating pilot signals and service signals. For example, if a concrete capacity simulation group is selected (as shown in Figure 4-5), the signal receiving status at the point is calculated using the uplink load, downlink load, and IOT of the group after the simulation is complete. If you set Simulation Group to (None), the signal receiving status at the point is calculated using the uplink load, downlink load, and IOT set in the cell table.

Figure 4-5 Point analysis (13)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 406 of 474

Page 427: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4.4 PrintThe U-Net can print display contents on the GIS map or print display contents in a PDF file. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Set print parameters: Choose File > Print to display the Print Setting window.

Figure 4-1 Entrance for printing setting

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 407 of 474

Page 428: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Printing setting window (1)

Parameter Description:

Parameters on the Page tab page are as follows:

Figure 4-3 Printing setting window (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 408 of 474

Page 429: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Name: indicates the template name. You can configure a template and select a template when printing related results.

Orientation: indicates the page orientation. The parameter value can be Portrait or Landscape.

Paper: indicates the paper size and source. Size: indicates the paper size, such as A4. Source: indicates the paper source and the default value is used.

Scaling: indicates the print scale. Fit to Page indicates that the selected map area is automatically adjusted to a proper size so that all contents are printed on a piece of paper; Scale indicates that the print scale is customized.

Margins: indicates the page margins. Left indicates the left margin, Right indicates the right margin, Top indicates the top margin, and Bottom indicates the bottom margin.

Parameters on the Components tab page are as follows:

Figure 4-4 Printing setting window (3)

Rulers: indicates whether to print the map ruler.

Print Area: sets the print area. The default value is Full Map. That is, the entire operation area is printed.

Legend: sets the position of the legend information on the print map.

Comments: indicates whether to add comments to the print paper. Also, you can select the location of the comments. Position indicates the position of the selected comments. On the Map indicates whether the selected comments are displayed on the map.

Parameters on the Header/Footer tab page are as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 409 of 474

Page 430: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-5 Printing setting window (4)

Logo1 area: indicates whether to add logo1.

− Position: indicates the position of the selected logo.

− On the Map: indicates whether the selected logo is displayed on the map.

Logo2 area: The same as the Logo1 area.

Title area: sets the title.

− Position: sets the position of the selected title.

− On the Map: indicates whether the selected title is displayed on the map.

Contents of the title are set in the blank area.

Header/Footer area: indicates whether to add the header and footer.

− Position: indicates the position of the selected header/footer.

− On the Map: indicates whether the selected header/footer is displayed on the map.

Contents of the header/footer are displayed set in the blank area.

Step 2 Select a set template and click Preview to preview the print effect or click Print to print the picture.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 410 of 474

Page 431: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Print preview/print (1)

Figure 4-2 Print preview/print (2)

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 411 of 474

Page 432: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4.5 Propagation Model CalibrationBefore using the propagation model calibration function in the U-Net, complete the following work:

Import corresponding map data to the project.

Import or create engineering parameters (Site, Transceiver, and Cell) corresponding to the CW data of the project.

Prepare the CW data file or DT data file. You can pre-process the data in the file to avoid that the data amount is excessively large. If the Probe is used for the drive test, the Assistant can be used to process the data file. If other tools are used for the drive test, the data file is processed by another tool.

The propagation model calibration function can be performed only after the drive test data is pre-processed. The U-Net does not support the data pre-processing.

4.5.1 Description of the CW FileThe U-Net supports the CW data exported by the Probe in TXT, CSV, and XLS formats. The CW data must include the latitude/longitude information and RSRP information about each Bin point. The CW data can also include other optional information, such as PCI. Figure 4-1 shows the format of a typical CW data file.

Figure 4-1 CW data file

4.5.2 Importing the Bin Point InformationOn the Data tab page, right-click CW Measurement and choose Import.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 412 of 474

Page 433: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Entrance for importing DT data

In the window, choose a CW file and click Open to display the Import File window.

Figure 4-2 Window for importing the CW data

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 413 of 474

Page 434: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Parameters in the Import File window are described as follows:

Parameters in the Configuration area are basic setting items for importing files. You can click Save to save all settings of the window to the file or click Load to load the preceding settings. 1st Data Row: indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in this row and the subsequent rows is imported. Field Separator: indicates the method of separating fields.

Parameters in the Reference Transceiver area are setting items for Bin point information. Name: indicates the name of the transceiver corresponding to the Bin point data. Frequency: indicates the frequency of the transceiver.

Parameters in the Receiver area are setting items for the receiver information. Currently, these parameters are not used in the propagation model calibration of the U-Net.

Parameters in the Field Mapping area setting items for Bin point import data. Contents of a CW file can be previewed in the Field Mapping area and columns are automatically matched. You need to confirm whether the matched column information is correct. If the matched column information is incorrect, you need to manually modify the matching relationship.

After all data are set, click Import… to import the CW data. If the data is successfully imported, the corresponding data is displayed in the navigation tree and the corresponding Bin point is displayed on the GIS map.

Figure 4-3 Project display after the CW data is imported

4.5.3 Performing the Propagation Model Calibration

You can perform the propagation model calibration after the CW data is imported. On the Data tab page, right-click CW Measurement and choose Automatically Calibrate.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 414 of 474

Page 435: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Starting the propagation model calibration from the navigation tree

Figure 4-2 Window for setting the propagation model calibration

You can set parameters in the Adjust Form window. Parameters are described as follows:

Select Propagation Model: selects the SPM model to be calibrated.

Select Measurement File: selects the CW file whose data is used for the calibration.

Calibrate Limitation: Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the clutter loss is considered. If this parameter is selected, the calibration item contains the loss of clutters of each type. Standard Deviation indicates the standard deviation allowed by the calibration. The default value is 8 dB. Usually, the deviation ranging from 8 dB to 11 dB is acceptable. Cell Edge Coverage Probability indicates the coverage probability at the cell. Retain the default value of 75% unless otherwise specified.

Select the Parameters that You Want to Calibrate: selects the SPM model coefficient participating in the calibration.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 415 of 474

Page 436: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

After all parameters are set, click Calibrate to perform the propagation model calibration. If the calibration is successful, a window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Result of propagation model calibration

As shown in Figure 4-3, the table on the upper left part shows the data of each coefficient in the SPM before and after the calibration. The lower left part shows some statistics information. The figure on the right part shows the path loss calculated by the propagation model, path loss during the actual drive test, and path loss calculated after the calibration. If you are satisfied with the calibration result, you can click Commit to submit the calibrated coefficient to the propagation model. If you are not satisfied with the propagation mode, you can click Next to set parameters and perform the calibration again.

4.6 U-Net Map CalibrationAfter a map is imported, you may find that the Clutter layer has position deviation with the Height layer or the Building layer, or has position deviation with the imported engineering parameters. You can use the map calibration function to manually adjust the position of a single layer.

On the Project Explorer pane, right-click Map and choose Adjust Map, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 416 of 474

Page 437: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Map calibration (1)

You can select the layer to the adjusted from the Map Layer down-down list and set the step length for each adjustment (the step length ranging from 10 m to 10000 m). Click the four direction buttons. Each time you click a direction button, the selected layer is moved to the specified direction at the specified step length.

Figure 4-2 Map calibration (2)

Figure 4-3 shows the map adjustment effect. The Clutter layer is separated from the Height layer.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 417 of 474

Page 438: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Map calibration (3)

The adjusted position is saved in the project. The index file of the map, however, is not overwritten.

4.7 Interconnection with the MapInfoThe U-Net supports the import and export of polygons in the formats supported by the MapInfo, the export of prediction results in the formats supported by the MapInfo, and the display of prediction results in the MapInfo.

4.7.1 PolygonThe U-Net supports the export of polygons in MIF or TAB formats. You can set Export Type to Longitude/Latitude or X/Y. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click the polygon to be exported in the navigation tree (you can export polygons in batches on the Polygon node) and choose Export.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 418 of 474

Page 439: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Exporting polygons in MIF format (1)

Step 2 Set the export format, MIF or TAB.

Figure 4-1 Exporting polygons in MIF format (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 419 of 474

Page 440: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

When importing polygons in MIF or TAB formats from the U-Net, you can set Import Type to Longitude/Latitude or X/Y. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 3 On the GEO tab page, right-click Polygons and choose Import.

Figure 4-1 Importing polygons in MIF format (1)

Step 4 Set the import format, MIF or TAB. Select the polygons to be imported. Multiple polygons can be selected at the same time.

Figure 4-1 Importing polygons in MIF format (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 420 of 474

Page 441: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

----End

4.7.2 Exporting Prediction ResultsThe U-Net supports the export of prediction results in MIF format. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click a prediction group and choose Export Results.

Figure 4-1 Exporting prediction results (1)

Step 2 In the Export Results window, set the export path, select MIF, and click Export.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 421 of 474

Page 442: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Exporting prediction results (2)

Only the information displayed on the GIS map can be exported.

----End

4.8 Interconnection with the Google Earth

The U-Net supports the display of base stations, cells, polygons, prediction results, capacity simulation results, and drive test points on the Google Earth. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Click the Switch To EarthView button on the tool bar to display the configuration window.

Figure 4-1 Interconnection with the Google Earth (1)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 422 of 474

Page 443: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Interconnection with the Google Earth (2)

The parameters are as follows:

Sites: indicates whether to display base stations and sectors.

Export Sites: indicates the sites to be displayed.

Polygons: indicates whether to display polygons.

Simulation Users: indicates whether to display the capacity simulation results.

Drive Test: indicates whether to display DT data.

CW Measurement: indicates whether to display CW data.

Transceiver Radius: indicates the radius of the sector displayed on the client. Usually, the radius ranges from 1 m to 1000 m.

Predictions: indicates whether to display the prediction results.

Transparency: indicates the transparency of the prediction results.

Step 2 After setting the preceding parameters, click View (to directly start the Google Earth client in the U-Net) or Save (to save the results in a KMZ/KML file and then start the Google Earth client separately to display the KMZ/KML file).

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 423 of 474

Page 444: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Interconnection with the Google Earth (3)

If you need to display multiple prediction result layers on the Google Earth separately, you are advised to save the results in a KMZ/KML file and start the Google Earth client separately to view the KMZ/KML file.

If you start the Google Earth client using the U-Net, you have to start the client for multiple times. You cannot control the layer display mode of the Google Earth in the U-Net.

----End

4.9 Combining Maps with Different Precisions

You need to combine maps with different precisions in the following scenarios:

Based on the Volcano ray tracing model, the prediction is performed using maps of four precisions, 5 m, 20 m, 50 m, and 100 m. The area of the map with the precision of 100 m is the largest and contains the areas of other three maps. The four maps are overlapped, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 424 of 474

Page 445: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Relations of maps with four precisions

100m

50m

20m

5m

The prediction at the boundary of the map may be abnormal when the Volcano ray tracing model is used for the prediction of sites at the boundary of the map. As shown in Figure 4-2, the Volcano mini model is used when the base stations are at the boundary of the map with the precision of 5 m. The prediction area is available only in the map with the precision of 5 m but is unavailable in the map with the precision of 20 m. Therefore, the prediction result is unavailable.

Figure 4-2 Prediction before maps are combined

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 425 of 474

Page 446: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

During the simulation of the U-Net, the map data is set separately for the Volcano ray tracing model. The map data imported by the U-Net cannot be used by the Volcano ray tracing model. The setting of the map data for the Volcano ray tracing model is shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Volcano map parameter settings

The solution to the problem is as follows:

Combine maps with different precisions to a map and set the combined map in the Volcano model.

Take a project as example. There are maps with four precisions, 5 m, 20 m, 50 m, and 100 m. You need to combine disk file corresponding to the Clutter layer and those corresponding to the Height layer.

Combine Clutter layers:

1. Combine menu files. Uniformly number clutter IDs of all maps in a menu file. If clutter IDs are repeated and stand for different clutters, you need to set clutter IDs again. Note that effective clutter IDs range from 1 to 254. Figure 4-1 shows clutter ID description of maps with four precisions before these maps are combined.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 426 of 474

Page 447: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Clutter ID description before maps are combined

Figure 4-2 shows the clutter ID after maps are combined.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 427 of 474

Page 448: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Clutter ID description after maps are combined.

1 water

2 sea

3 wet l and

4 suburban open area

5 urban open area

6 green l and

7 forest

8 hi gh bui l di ngs (hei ght40m_60m)

9 hi gh bui l di ngs (hei ght>60m)

10 ordi nary bui l di ng (hei ght 40m~20m)

11 paral l el regul ar bui l di ngs (hei ght<20m)

12 i rregul ar l arge bui l di ngs

13 suburban vi l l age

14 i rregul ar bui l di nd (hei ght<20m)

21 water

22 sea

23 wet l and

24 suburban open area

25 urban open area

26 green l and

27 forest

28 hi gh bui l di ngs

29 ordi nary bui l di ng (hei ght 40m~20m)

30 paral l el regul ar bui l di ngs (hei ght<20m)

31 i rregul ar l arge bui l di ngs

32 i rregul ar bui l di nd (hei ght<20m)

33 suburban vi l l age

40 hi gh bui l di ngs (hei ght40m_60m)

41 hi gh bui l di ngs (hei ght>60m)

51 Water

52 Forest

53 Green_l and

54 Urban_Open_Area

55 SubUrban_Open_Area

56 Hi gh_Urban

57 Dense_Urban

58 Urban

59 SubUrban

60 Vi l l age

101 Water

102 Forest

103 Green_l and

104 Urban

105 SubUrban

106 Open area

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 428 of 474

Page 449: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

2. Modify the binary files of maps with four precisions based on the new clutter ID and modify the data in the original binary files in batches using the new clutter IDs. Saving modes of maps in different formats are different. For example, in maps in planet format, two bytes stand for a lattice. The first byte is usually 00 and the last byte is the real data. For maps in other formats, such as bil or grc, one byte stands for a lattice.

3. Combine contents in index files of maps with different precisions to an index file.

4. Copy binary files of maps with all precisions to the same directory of the index file.

Combine Height files: You only need to copy the binary file to the same directory of the index file and modify the index file.

Combine Vector layers: You cannot combine Vector layers. Vector layers of maps with different precisions must be separated by different directories.

Combine Building layers: The folders can be used directly.

After the Volcano mini model imports the combined map, the prediction in the area of the map with the precision of 20 m is normal, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Prediction figure of the combined map

4.10 Obtaining the Coordinate System of the Map Based on the Map File

Generally, when you import a map in quick import mode, the projection system is automatically imported to the U-Net. If you import a layer (Clutter/Height/Building) separately, the U-Net does not read the projection

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 429 of 474

Page 450: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

information. You need to manually set the coordinate system based on the map file.

The coordinate system is determined based on the coordinate system of the map. The coordinate system of the map is saved in the Projection file of the Heights folder.

Step 1 Use the text editing tool to open the Projection file, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Format of the Projection file

The first line: GRS-1980 indicates that the ellipsoid model of the map is GRS-1980.

The second line: 32 indicates the zone number of the projection zone. The same projection zone has two models, southern hemisphere and northern hemisphere. You can determine the hemisphere of the map based on the last-digit data of the fourth line. When setting the coordinate system, select 32S for a map of the southern hemisphere and 32N for a map of the northern hemisphere.

The third line: UTM indicates that the projection mode of the map is the UTM mode.

The fourth line: The first data indicates latitude and the second data indicates longitude. An origin point can be determined based on the latitude and longitude. The third data indicates the offset in the X direction compared with the origin point (a value larger than 0 indicates the offset in the western direction and a value smaller than 0 indicates the offset in the eastern direction). The fourth data indicates the offset in the Y direction compared with the origin point (a value larger than 0 indicates the offset in the southern direction and a value smaller than 0 indicates the offset in the northern direction). The point after the offset is the coordinate origin point of the current projection system.

Step 2 Set the coordinate system of the U-Net. On the GEO tab page, right-click Map and choose Coordinate to display the Coordinate Systems window.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 430 of 474

Page 451: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Setting the projection system (1)

Figure 4-2 Setting the projection system (2)

Step 3 In the preceding example, the UTM projection mode is used. Therefore, set Find in to WGS84 UTM zones. The longitude zone is 32 and the map is for the northern hemisphere. Therefore, select the WGS81/UTM zone 32N line and click Apply to apply the current projection system.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 431 of 474

Page 452: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Setting the projection system (3)

Figure 4-2 Selecting a coordinate system

----End

4.11 Tips for Using the U-Net

4.11.1 Hiding and Unhiding Columns of a Table

Function description: You can view data of some columns in the table and customize whether to display the major properties.

This function can be used in Site, Transceiver, and Cell tables.

The following is an example of filtering the Cell Name field in the Cell table. The operation procedure is as follows:

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 432 of 474

Page 453: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Step 1 Open the Cell table.

Figure 4-1 Cell table

Step 2 Deselect Cell Name.

Figure 4-1 Selecting the properties to be displayed

----End

4.11.2 RollbackFunction description: You can roll back operations of the latest three steps. The rollback can be performed on the GIS map, such as moving sites or polygons on the GIS map.

The rollback procedure is as follows:

Choose Edit > Undo.

Also, you can press Ctrl+Z to perform the rollback.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 433 of 474

Page 454: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Performing the rollback on the GIS map

4.11.3 Custom FieldsFunction description: You can add custom properties to the Site, Transceiver, and Cell tables as required.

The following is an example of adding the area field to the Cell table. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click the Cell table and choose Table Fields.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 434 of 474

Page 455: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Custom fields (1)

Step 2 In the displayed Table Fields dialog box, click Add to add custom fields.

Figure 4-1 Custom fields (2)

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 435 of 474

Page 456: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Custom fields (3)

Group: This parameter is not in use. The value is the same as that of Legend.

Legend: indicates the name of a custom field.

Type: indicates the data type. The U-Net supports four data types, Text, Integer, Double, and Boolean.

Default Value: indicates the default value of a custom field.

Choice List: indicates optional values of a custom field. If no values are set, you can manually set values for the field in the table. If values are set, you can only view and modify these set values.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 436 of 474

Page 457: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-3 Custom fields (4)

4.11.4 Searching for NEsFunction description: You can quickly locate NEs on the GIS map. After NEs are found, they are centered and highlighted in blue.

On the GIS map, you can search for NEs by the name of a site, transceiver, or repeater. The operation procedure is as follows:

Choose Edit > Find.

Also, you can press Ctrl+F to search for NEs.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 437 of 474

Page 458: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Searching for NEs (1)

Figure 4-2 Searching for NEs (2)

4.11.5 Moving a Site to a Higher LocationFunction description: You can move the site to the highest location in the area with the specified radius. The operation procedure is as follows:

Step 1 Right-click a site and choose Move to a Higher Location.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 438 of 474

Page 459: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Moving a site to a higher location (1)

Step 2 Search for the highest point within the specified radius. The height of the Building layer can be included.

Figure 4-1 Moving a site to a higher location (2)

Step 3 The site is automatically moved to the highest points in the specified area.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 439 of 474

Page 460: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Moving a site to a higher location (3)

----End

4.11.6 Terrain ViewFunction description: You can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terrain information about the two points.

Step 1 Choose Terrain View.

Figure 4-1 Viewing the terrain profile (1)

Step 2 Fix two points on the map. Select a point and move the cursor. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed on the lower right part.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 440 of 474

Page 461: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Viewing the terrain profile (2)

----End

4.11.7 Distance MeasurementStep 1 Choose Distance Measurement on the tool bar.

Figure 4-1 Distance measurement (1)

Step 2 On the GIS map, fix a point and move another point with the cursor. The distance between the two points and the sliding coordinate information are displayed on the lower part of the window.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 441 of 474

Page 462: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Distance measurement (2)

----End

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 442 of 474

Page 463: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4.12 Summary of Propagation Model Parameters

4.12.1 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata

Figure 4-1 Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata parameter window

Diffraction Loss Method: indicates the diffraction loss calculation, including Bullington, Epstein and Peterson, Deygout, and Atlas.

Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: indicates the algorithm for calculating the effective height of the transmitter antenna.

− AbsSpot: indicates the absolute height of the receiver.

− Height above the ground: indicates the height higher than the ground surface.

− Height above the average ground: indicates the height higher than the average ground surface.

− Spot Hr: indicates the relative height of the receiver.

− Slope At Receiver: indicates the relative height of the receiver slope.

− Enhanced Slope at receiver: indicates the relative height of the enhanced receiver slope.

Limitation to free space loss: indicates whether to limit the loss in the free space. This parameter is not used during the actual calculation.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 443 of 474

Page 464: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

In the mountain area, the prediction results of the U-Net and those of the Atoll are different. The diffraction function is enabled in the propagation mode of the Atoll. The diffraction function of the U-Net is disabled by default. After the diffraction function of the U-Net is manually enabled, the prediction results of the U-Net are basically the same as those of the Atoll.

4.12.2 Clutter Related HataThe Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata model does not take losses of different clutters into consideration. The U-Net provides two Hata models related to clutters. You can choose different propagation models for different clutters.

Figure 4-1 Clutter Related Cost Hata parameter window

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 444 of 474

Page 465: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-2 Clutter Related Okumura Hata parameter window

Parameters Clutter: indicates all clutters contained in a map.

Propagation Model: indicates the Cost-Hata/Okumura Hata model used by each clutter in different scenarios.

Loss: indicates the loss of the clutter.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 445 of 474

Page 466: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4.12.3 SPM

Figure 4-1 SPM parameter window

Parameters Add building height: indicates whether to consider the building height.

Clutter Loss Calculate Method: indicates the algorithm for calculating the clutter loss. If the effective antenna length is calculated by adding the building height to the altitude, the impact of the clutter (mainly refers to the building) on the diffraction loss has been taken into consideration. If the building height is not added, the impact of the building on the diffraction loss is separately taken into consideration. In this case, the clutter attenuation (mainly caused by the building) needs to be calculated.

− Uniform: indicates the uniform weight.

− Triangular: indicates the triangular weight.

− Logarithmic: indicates the logarithmic weight.

− Exponential: indicates the exponential weight.

Diffraction Loss Method: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

Max Distance: indicates the distance limitation for calculating the clutter loss. For example, if Max Distance is set to 50 m, this indicates that only the clutter loss within 50 m between the receiver and the transceiver is calculated when calculating the clutter loss. (If the distance between

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 446 of 474

Page 467: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

the receiver and the transceiver is smaller than 50 m, only the clutter loss within their distances is calculated.)

Receiver on top clutter: indicates whether the receiver is on the top of the clutter (mainly refers to the building).

Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

Parameters on the Clutter tab page are described as follows:

Name: indicates the name of a clutter.

Losses(dB): indicates the loss corresponding to the clutter.

Clearance(m): indicates that the clutter loss within the specified scope is taken into consideration.

Rx Height(m): indicates the clutter height.

4.12.4 ITURP

Figure 4-1 ITURP parameter window

Effect Tx Height Calculate Method: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 447 of 474

Page 468: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

4.12.5 Keenan-Motley

Figure 4-1 Keenan-Motley parameter window

Limitation to free space loss: See the parameter description for Cost-Hata parameters.

4.12.6 VolcanoThe property window of the Volcano model is shown in Figure 4-1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 448 of 474

Page 469: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Volcano model setting (1)

The Volcano_Urban model includes settings of parameters on tab pages such as Settings, Clutters, Propagation, and Advanced tuning.

1. Parameter settings on the Settings tab page

Altitude (DTM)/Elevation (DEM)/Clutter classes (DLU)/Clutter heights (DHM)/3D Vectors/2D Vectors: indicates the map information. When a map on the GEO tab page of the U-Net is imported, the Volcano model can automatically obtains the map information.

Vector height reference: indicates the settings of the vector altitude. This parameter is activated only when the 3D vector layer is contained in the map.

Prediction preferences: settings of prediction parameters

Vertical analysis mode: indicates the vertical analysis mode. When the imported map is a raster map, the parameter value is Raster favourite; when the imported map contains a vector map, the parameter value is Vector favorite.

Coverage prediction mode: indicates the coverage prediction mode. Regular: indicates the frequently-used calculation mode. Boost: indicates the optimized calculation mode. In this mode, the calculation time is decreased. Along linears: This mode is used for calculating the linear vector maps. In this mode, the calculation time is decreased.

Raster solution strategy: indicates the raster solution strategy.

Tx inside map data building: indicates the height of the TX antenna. Really indoor: indicates the indoor antenna. When the parameter value is Really indoor, the indoor loss is taken into the consideration for the Volcano model. Actually outdoor: indicates the outdoor antenna. When

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 449 of 474

Page 470: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

the parameter value is Actually outdoor, the loss is not taken into consideration for the Volcano model.

Reception height: indicates the height of the reception antenna (height of the mobile station).

Spatial averaging: indicates the spatial averaging switch. The switch is disabled by default. After the switch is enabled, the calibration precision can be improved by 0.3 dB to 0.5 dB but the calculation time will be increased by 15%.

2. Parameter settings on the Clutters tab page

You can set parameters related to the clutter type on the Clutters tab page. Clutter types in the table are read by the Volcano model from the imported map, including raster clutters and vector clutters, as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Volcano model setting (2)

Loss: indicates the clutter loss.

Linear loss(dB/m): indicates the linear loss of the clutter.

Height: indicates the clutter height. This parameter can be set only in raster maps.

Clutter exclusion: indicates that users of the selected clutter types are not considered when prediction signals are calculated.

Prediction along linears: This area is used when the path loss matrix file of the linear vector is imported. This parameter is set when Coverage prediction mode is set to Along linears, and the preceding clutter tables contain linear clutters.

3. Parameter settings on the Propagation tab page

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 450 of 474

Page 471: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Figure 4-1 Volcano model setting (3)

Global parameters area: indicates global parameters.

− a(deterministic loss weight): indicates the deterministic loss weight. The typical value is 0.7.

− Antenna correction: indicates the antenna correction switch.

Direct-path correction area: indicates the direction-path (of the free space) correction factor. Afar and Bfar indicate the free-space loss correction factor of reception equipment in a remote area.

Multiple-path components area: indicates multiple-path calculation parameters. This parameter must be selected when the multiple-path ray tracing is enabled.

− Ray-tracing parameters: indicates ray tracing parameters.

Radius(m): indicates the ray tracing radius. Usually, the radius ranges from 500 m to 800 m.

Street level mode: indicates the street level mode. Flat indicates flat streets and Hilly indicates hilly streets.

− Multiple-path correction: indicates multiple-path correction factor. Anear and Bnear indicate free-space loss correction factor of reception equipment in a near area. The recommended value of Anear is 0 and the recommended value of Bnear is 23 dB/dec.

− Max. number of interactions

Diffraction: indicates the maximum diffraction number. The parameter value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1. The recommended value is 1.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 451 of 474

Page 472: Guide to Performing LTE Simulation Operations by Using the U-Net V3R9

GENEX U-Net LTE仿真操作指导书 3 Planning and Simulation

Reflection: indicates the maximum reflection number. The parameter value is an integer ranging from 0 to 4. The recommended value is 2.

− Interaction weighting

Diffraction: indicates the diffraction weight. The parameter value ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.

Reflection: indicates the reflection weight. The parameter value ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.

Backward: indicates the weight of the returned lost signals. The value ranges from 0.5 to 1. The recommended value is 1.

Allow antenna masking/unmasking: indicates the antenna ambiguity matching. After the parameter is selected, the calculation time is obviously decreased. The calculation results may be incorrect. It is recommended that this parameter is not selected for multi-core CPUs.

4. Parameter settings on the Advance tuning tab page

Figure 4-1 Volcano model setting (4)

Enable clutter attenuation tuning: This parameter is used in 2D vector maps with low precision. The clutter attenuation is taken into consideration during the calibration.

Enable clutter height tuning: This parameter is used in 2D vector maps with low precision. The clutter height is taken into consideration during the calibration.

2023-04-20 Huawei Confidential Page 452 of 474